HP Color LaserJet 3800 Printer Software Technical Reference, External ENWW Laser Jet Reference C00563734

User Manual: HP HP Color LaserJet 3800 Printer - Software Technical Reference

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 416 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
Software Technical Reference
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
Software Technical Reference
Copyright and license
©2005 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Edition 1, 11/2005
Trademark credits
Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®,
PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Corel® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel
Corporation Limited.
EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo®
are US registered marks of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
FireWire® FireWire is a trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Java™ is a US trademark of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus
Torvalds.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
PANTONE*® is *Pantone, Inc.'s check-
standard trademark for color.
Pentium® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Intel Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Table of contents
1 Purpose and scope
Introduction.............................................................................................................................................1
HP Color LaserJet 3800.........................................................................................................................4
Printing-system software........................................................................................................................7
System requirements.............................................................................................................7
Windows................................................................................................................7
Macintosh..............................................................................................................7
Linux......................................................................................................................7
UNIX......................................................................................................................8
Supported operating systems ...............................................................................................8
Standalone drivers ...............................................................................................8
Print driver support in other operating systems.....................................................8
Availability..............................................................................................................................9
Printing-system software on the Web...................................................................9
Printing-system software .....................................................................9
Software component availability ........................................................10
In-box printing-system software CDs .................................................................11
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition ....................................11
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition...................................12
CD versions........................................................................................12
HP LaserJet documentation.................................................................................................................18
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.................................................................19
Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes................20
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide..............................................................................20
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide......................................................................................21
2 Software description
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................23
Printing-system software......................................................................................................................24
Windows software features..................................................................................................24
Printing system and installer...............................................................................24
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD for
Windows systems ..............................................................................24
Installer features.................................................................................26
HP LaserJet print drivers.....................................................................................27
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers.....................................27
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems...........28
Macintosh printing-system software....................................................................................29
Mac OS 9 Classic support...................................................................................30
ENWW iii
Macintosh printing system...................................................................................30
Driver Configuration for Windows.........................................................................................................31
Driver autoconfiguration.......................................................................................................31
Bidirectional communication................................................................................................31
Enterprise AutoConfiguration...............................................................................................31
Update Now.........................................................................................................................33
HP Driver Preconfiguration..................................................................................................34
Lockable features ...............................................................................................35
Continuous export ..............................................................................................36
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.............................................................................................37
Color Access Control............................................................................................................................38
International Color Consortium profiles................................................................................................40
PANTONE color profiles.......................................................................................................................41
HP Easy Printer Care...........................................................................................................................42
Installation options...............................................................................................................42
Access.................................................................................................................................43
Find Other Printers..............................................................................................................44
My HP Printers screen – Overview tab................................................................................49
HP Easy Printer Care – Support tab....................................................................................53
Maintenance Tools..............................................................................................55
Troubleshooting Tools.........................................................................................58
HP Embedded Web Server .................................................................................................................59
Access to the HP EWS........................................................................................................59
The HP EWS frame.............................................................................................................60
Information tab.....................................................................................................................60
Links to off-product solutions...............................................................................................61
Device Status screen ..........................................................................................................61
Configuration Page .............................................................................................................62
Settings tab..........................................................................................................................64
Configure device..................................................................................................................65
Alerts....................................................................................................................................66
Security................................................................................................................................68
Restrict Color.......................................................................................................................69
Networking tab ....................................................................................................................70
Configuration section..........................................................................................72
Security section...................................................................................................72
Diagnostics section.............................................................................................72
Network settings .................................................................................................72
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh............................................................................................................73
Access to the HP Printer Utility............................................................................................73
Supplies Status....................................................................................................................76
Device Information...............................................................................................................78
HP Support..........................................................................................................................79
Upload Fonts.......................................................................................................................80
File Upload...........................................................................................................................81
Update Firmware.................................................................................................................82
Duplex mode........................................................................................................................83
Color Usage.........................................................................................................................83
Trays Configuration.............................................................................................................84
Lock Resources...................................................................................................................84
iv ENWW
Stored Jobs..........................................................................................................................85
E-mail Alerts........................................................................................................................86
Network Settings..................................................................................................................87
Rendezvous Setting.............................................................................................................88
Supplies Management.........................................................................................................89
Restrict Color.......................................................................................................................90
Additional Settings...............................................................................................................93
HP Web Jetadmin................................................................................................................................94
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................95
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me.....................................................................97
Properties driver tabs...........................................................................................................97
Help system..........................................................................................................................................99
What's this? Help.................................................................................................................99
Context-sensitive Help.........................................................................................................99
Incompatible Options messages .........................................................................................99
Bubble Help.......................................................................................................................100
Finishing tab features.........................................................................................................................101
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................102
Default Print Settings........................................................................................102
User Guide Print Settings .................................................................................105
Document Options.............................................................................................................105
Print on Both Sides...........................................................................................106
Automatically printing on both sides ................................................106
Manually printing on both sides........................................................107
Flip Pages Up....................................................................................................108
Booklet Printing.................................................................................................109
Book and Booklet Printing................................................................109
Pages per Sheet...............................................................................................110
Print Page Borders............................................................................................111
Page Order........................................................................................................111
Document preview image..................................................................................................112
Print Quality.......................................................................................................................112
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver..................................112
Current Setting.................................................................................113
Graphic Settings...............................................................................113
Font Settings....................................................................................113
Output Settings.................................................................................113
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver..................................113
Current Setting.................................................................................114
Graphic Settings...............................................................................114
Font Settings ...................................................................................114
Output Settings.................................................................................115
Effects tab features............................................................................................................................116
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................117
Fit To Page........................................................................................................................117
Print Document On ...........................................................................................117
Scale to Fit........................................................................................................117
% of Normal Size..............................................................................................118
ENWW v
Document preview image..................................................................................................118
Watermarks.......................................................................................................................118
Current Watermarks..........................................................................................119
First Page Only.................................................................................................119
Edit…................................................................................................................119
Current Watermarks.........................................................................120
Watermark Message........................................................................121
Message Angle.................................................................................121
Document preview image.................................................................121
Font Attributes..................................................................................121
Default watermark settings...............................................................122
Paper tab features..............................................................................................................................124
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................125
Paper Options....................................................................................................................125
Size is................................................................................................................125
Custom..............................................................................................................126
Name................................................................................................127
Save, Delete, or Rename.................................................................128
Custom size (width and height controls)...........................................129
Custom width and height control limits.............................................129
Dynamic measurement units ...........................................................130
Close................................................................................................130
Source is...........................................................................................................130
Type is ..............................................................................................................131
Use Different Paper/Covers..............................................................................132
Front Cover.......................................................................................132
First Page.........................................................................................133
Other Pages.....................................................................................134
Last Page.........................................................................................134
Back Cover.......................................................................................135
Document preview image..................................................................................................136
Product image....................................................................................................................136
Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................................138
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................140
Status dialog box...............................................................................................................141
Job Storage Mode.............................................................................................................141
Off.....................................................................................................................141
Proof and Hold .................................................................................................141
Private Job........................................................................................................141
Quick Copy .......................................................................................................142
Stored Job.........................................................................................................142
PIN.....................................................................................................................................143
Job Notification Options.....................................................................................................143
User Name.........................................................................................................................143
Job Name..........................................................................................................................143
Using job-storage features when printing..........................................................................144
Releasing a job-storage print job......................................................................144
Deleting a job-storage print job.........................................................................145
Basics tab features ............................................................................................................................146
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................147
vi ENWW
Copies................................................................................................................................147
Orientation ........................................................................................................................147
Document preview image..................................................................................................148
About…..............................................................................................................................148
Color tab features...............................................................................................................................150
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................151
Color Options.....................................................................................................................151
Automatic..........................................................................................................151
Manual..............................................................................................................151
General.............................................................................................................152
Neutral Grays....................................................................................................153
Halftone.............................................................................................................153
Print in Grayscale..............................................................................................153
Color Themes....................................................................................................................154
RGB Color.........................................................................................................154
Default (sRGB).................................................................................154
Image Optimization (sRGB)..............................................................154
Adobe RGB (1998)...........................................................................154
None.................................................................................................154
Custom Profile..................................................................................155
CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only)......................................................155
Default CMYK+.................................................................................155
SWOP...............................................................................................155
Euroscale..........................................................................................155
DIC...................................................................................................155
Custom Profile..................................................................................155
Document preview image..................................................................................................156
Configure tab features .......................................................................................................................157
Printer Model.....................................................................................................................158
Paper Handling Options.....................................................................................................159
Duplexing unit...................................................................................................159
Allow Manual Duplexing....................................................................................159
Mopier Enabled ................................................................................................160
Mopier mode and collation...............................................................160
Optional Paper Sources ...................................................................................160
Other Options....................................................................................................................161
Storage..............................................................................................................161
Fonts.................................................................................................................162
Allow Scaling from Large Paper........................................................................163
Alternative Letterhead Mode.............................................................................163
Ignore Application Collation..............................................................................163
Printer Memory..................................................................................................163
Include Types in Application Source List .........................................................164
Automatic configuration.....................................................................................................164
Printer image.....................................................................................................................164
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features.......................................................................165
Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me.......................................165
PS 3 emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 3800...................................................165
Help system.......................................................................................................................166
What's this Help................................................................................................166
ENWW vii
Context-sensitive Help......................................................................................166
Paper tab features.............................................................................................................166
Paper size.........................................................................................................167
Layout...............................................................................................................168
Orientation.........................................................................................................169
Paper source.....................................................................................................169
Copies...............................................................................................................169
Unprintable Area…............................................................................................169
More Options….................................................................................................170
About …............................................................................................................170
Restore Defaults...............................................................................................171
Graphics tab features........................................................................................................171
Resolution ........................................................................................................172
Color Control.....................................................................................................172
Halftoning..........................................................................................................173
Special..............................................................................................................173
Scaling..............................................................................................................173
Restore Defaults...............................................................................................173
Fonts tab features..............................................................................................................174
Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table.........174
Font Substitution Table.....................................................................174
Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts...............................175
Always use TrueType fonts...............................................................................175
Send Fonts As…..............................................................................175
Restore Defaults...............................................................................176
Device Options tab features..............................................................................................176
Available printer memory..................................................................................178
Printer features..................................................................................................178
HPPJLEncoding...............................................................................179
Job storage.......................................................................................179
User Name.......................................................................................181
PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)..............................................................181
PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)..............................................................181
PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)..............................................................181
PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)..............................................................181
Print Color as Gray...........................................................................181
Collate..............................................................................................181
Fit to Page........................................................................................182
Color Options....................................................................................182
Color Themes for RGB Color...........................................................182
Color Themes for CMYK Color.........................................................183
Edge Control.....................................................................................183
Text Neutral Grays...........................................................................183
Text Halftone....................................................................................183
Graphic Neutral Grays......................................................................184
Graphic Halftone...............................................................................184
Photographs Neutral Grays..............................................................184
Photographs Halftone.......................................................................184
Watermark (Pages per Sheet)..........................................................184
Print Watermark................................................................................184
viii ENWW
Watermark........................................................................................185
Watermark Font................................................................................185
Watermark Size................................................................................185
Watermark Angle..............................................................................185
Watermark Style...............................................................................186
Watermark Color..............................................................................186
Watermark Intensity..........................................................................186
Using job-storage features when printing..........................................................187
Releasing a job-storage print job......................................................187
Deleting a job-storage print job.........................................................187
Installable options.............................................................................................188
Tray 3...............................................................................................188
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing).....................................................188
Mopier Mode.....................................................................................189
Printer Hard Disk..............................................................................189
Job storage.......................................................................................189
VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM)
in the product....................................................................................189
Restore Defaults...............................................................................................189
PostScript tab features......................................................................................................189
PostScript output format....................................................................................191
PostScript header..............................................................................................191
Print PostScript error information......................................................................191
PostScript timeout values..................................................................................191
Advanced….......................................................................................................192
PostScript Language Level...............................................................192
Bitmap compression.........................................................................192
Data format.......................................................................................193
Send CTRL+D before job.................................................................193
Send CTRL+D after job ...................................................................193
Restore Defaults...............................................................................................193
4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................195
Access to print drivers........................................................................................................................197
Printing Preferences driver tabs........................................................................................197
Properties driver tabs.........................................................................................................198
Help system........................................................................................................................................199
What's this? Help...............................................................................................................199
Context-sensitive Help.......................................................................................................199
Incompatible Print Settings messages...............................................................................199
Advanced tab features.......................................................................................................................201
Paper/Output.....................................................................................................................202
Copy Count ......................................................................................................202
Collated.............................................................................................................202
Graphic..............................................................................................................................203
Image Color Management.................................................................................203
True Type Font..................................................................................................203
Document Options.............................................................................................................203
Advanced Printing Features..............................................................................203
ENWW ix
Print Optimizations ...........................................................................................204
PostScript Options............................................................................................204
Printer Features................................................................................................205
Layout Options..................................................................................................206
Paper/Quality tab features..................................................................................................................207
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................208
Default Print Settings........................................................................................208
User Guide Print Settings..................................................................................211
Type new Quick Set name here .......................................................................212
Paper Options....................................................................................................................212
Size is................................................................................................................213
Custom Paper Size...........................................................................................213
Name................................................................................................214
Paper size.........................................................................................214
Units.................................................................................................215
Custom width and height control limits.............................................215
Source is...........................................................................................................215
Type is...............................................................................................................216
Use Different Paper/Covers...............................................................................................217
Front Cover.......................................................................................................217
First Page..........................................................................................................218
Other Pages......................................................................................................219
Last Page..........................................................................................................220
Back Cover........................................................................................................221
Document preview image..................................................................................................223
HP Digital Imaging.............................................................................................................223
Effects tab features............................................................................................................................225
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................226
Resizing Options................................................................................................................226
Actual Size........................................................................................................226
Print Document On ...........................................................................................226
Scale to Fit .......................................................................................................226
% of Normal Size..............................................................................................227
Document preview image..................................................................................................227
Watermarks.......................................................................................................................228
Current watermarks...........................................................................................229
Watermark Message.........................................................................................229
Message Angle.................................................................................................229
Font Attributes...................................................................................................230
Default watermark settings................................................................................231
Finishing tab features.........................................................................................................................232
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................233
Document Options.............................................................................................................233
Print on Both Sides...........................................................................................233
Automatically printing on both sides ................................................234
Manually printing on both sides........................................................234
Flip Pages Up....................................................................................................236
Booklet layout....................................................................................................236
Book and Booklet Printing................................................................236
Pages per Sheet...............................................................................................237
xENWW
Print Page Borders............................................................................................237
Page Order........................................................................................................237
Document preview image..................................................................................................238
Orientation.........................................................................................................................238
Job Storage tab features....................................................................................................................240
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................243
Status group box................................................................................................................243
Job Storage Mode.............................................................................................................243
Off.....................................................................................................................243
Proof and Hold .................................................................................................243
Private Job........................................................................................................244
Quick Copy........................................................................................................244
Stored Job.........................................................................................................244
Require PIN.......................................................................................................................245
Job Notification Options.....................................................................................................245
User Name.........................................................................................................................245
Job Name..........................................................................................................................246
Using job-storage features when printing..........................................................................246
Releasing a job-storage print job......................................................................247
Deleting a job-storage print job.........................................................................247
Color tab features...............................................................................................................................248
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................249
Color Options.....................................................................................................................249
Automatic..........................................................................................................249
Manual..............................................................................................................249
General.............................................................................................................250
Neutral Grays....................................................................................................251
Halftone.............................................................................................................251
Color Themes....................................................................................................................251
Default (sRGB)..................................................................................................252
Image Optimization (sRGB)..............................................................................252
Adobe RGB (1998)............................................................................................252
None..................................................................................................................252
Custom Profile...................................................................................................252
Document preview image..................................................................................................253
Services tab features..........................................................................................................................254
Internet Services................................................................................................................255
Device services..................................................................................................................255
Device Settings tab features..............................................................................................................256
Form to Tray Assignment..................................................................................................257
Font Substitution Table......................................................................................................257
External Fonts....................................................................................................................258
Installing external fonts.....................................................................................259
Removing external fonts...................................................................................259
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings............................................................................260
Available PostScript Memory............................................................................260
Output Protocol.................................................................................................260
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job............................................................................261
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ..............................................................................261
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray...............................................................261
ENWW xi
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray.......................................................261
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts...............................................261
Job Timeout......................................................................................................261
Wait Timeout.....................................................................................................261
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline.....................................................262
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ...................................................262
Installable Options.............................................................................................................262
Automatic Configuration....................................................................................262
Tray 3................................................................................................................263
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) ....................................................................263
Allow Manual Duplexing....................................................................................263
Printer Memory..................................................................................................263
Printer Hard Disk...............................................................................................263
Job storage.......................................................................................................263
Mopier Mode.....................................................................................................263
Mopier mode and collation................................................................................264
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only).....................................264
About tab features..............................................................................................................................266
5 Installing Windows printing-system components
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................267
Font support.......................................................................................................................................268
Basic fonts ........................................................................................................................268
Default fonts.......................................................................................................................268
Installation instructions.......................................................................................................................274
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems ....................274
Installing from the printing-system CD..............................................................274
Installing from a network or from downloaded files ..........................................274
Detailed Windows installation............................................................................................275
Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons..............................................275
Modifying a pre-existing installation..................................................................276
Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port................................276
Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence ...............................276
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.......................................................297
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows.....................................................298
Running the Installer Customization Wizard.....................................298
Dialogs..............................................................................................299
Distribution........................................................................................311
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server
2003..................................................................................................................311
Setting a default printer......................................................................................................312
6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................313
Macintosh component descriptions....................................................................................................314
HP LaserJet PPDs.............................................................................................................314
PDEs..................................................................................................................................314
HP Embedded Web Server...............................................................................................314
Install notes........................................................................................................................314
Online help.........................................................................................................................314
xii ENWW
Screen fonts.......................................................................................................................315
Installing the Macintosh printing system.............................................................................................316
Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the Macintosh OS.......................316
Setting up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9. V9.2.2 (Mac OS X
Classic)..............................................................................................................................317
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4.........................................................................318
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3.........................................................................325
Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x.................................................326
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system........................................................................................327
In-box disk layout...............................................................................................................................328
Mac OS X Classic installation............................................................................................................329
Main Install dialog-box sequence......................................................................................329
Mac OS X installation.........................................................................................................................330
Main Install dialog box sequence.......................................................................................330
7 Engineering Details
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................335
File to E-mail utility.............................................................................................................................336
HP Easy Printer Care.........................................................................................................................338
Availability..........................................................................................................................338
Uninstall options................................................................................................................338
HP Software Update..........................................................................................................338
Media attributes..................................................................................................................................339
Media sources and destinations........................................................................................339
Media-source commands..................................................................................................339
Driver-supported media sizes............................................................................................340
Driver-supported media types............................................................................................341
Custom paper sizes...........................................................................................................342
Media-type commands......................................................................................................343
Remote firmware update ...................................................................................................................344
Determining the current level of firmware .........................................................................344
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site......................................................344
Downloading the new firmware to the product...................................................................344
Printer messages during the firmware update ..................................................................345
Downloading custom color profiles....................................................................................346
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser...............................................347
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection...........................348
Windows operating systems.............................................................................348
Macintosh operating systems............................................................................349
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port ...................................................350
Windows 98 or Windows Me.............................................................................350
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 ......................................................................................351
Remote firmware update through a USB port....................................................................352
Remote firmware update through a Windows network .....................................................352
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems .....................................................................353
Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility....................................................353
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only)...................354
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command .....................................................355
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin .......................................................355
ENWW xiii
Printing print-ready documents .........................................................................................................357
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser...................................................357
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection...............................357
Windows operating systems.............................................................................358
Macintosh operating systems............................................................................359
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port............................................................359
Windows 98 or Windows Me.............................................................................360
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003.......................................................................................360
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network...................................................................361
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems...........................................................................361
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command .........................................................361
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems...................................................................362
Job-stream output .............................................................................................................362
PCL 6 raster compression ................................................................................................362
PJL/PJL Encoding.............................................................................................................363
Job tracking.......................................................................................................................363
Connectivity/Printing..........................................................................................................364
Bidirectional communication .............................................................................................364
HP Driver Preconfiguration ...............................................................................................365
Bundle support...................................................................................................................365
Tray and paper assignment...............................................................................................366
Installable options .............................................................................................................366
Printer services .................................................................................................................367
UI features ........................................................................................................................367
Help features ....................................................................................................................367
Print Task Quick Sets........................................................................................................368
Media sizes........................................................................................................................368
Media types.......................................................................................................................369
Job storage .......................................................................................................................369
Print quality and resolution................................................................................................370
Reordering Options............................................................................................................370
Resizing options................................................................................................................371
Color settings.....................................................................................................................371
Watermarks ......................................................................................................................372
Alternative source/paper type............................................................................................372
Printing destination............................................................................................................373
Finishing options and duplexing........................................................................................373
Other document options....................................................................................................373
Font support.......................................................................................................................374
Postscript-specific features................................................................................................374
Index...................................................................................................................................................................377
xiv ENWW
List of tables
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview...........................................................................................1
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features.........................................................................................4
Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer............................................10
Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe....................................................................................................13
Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe............................................................................................................14
Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian..........................................................................15
Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe..............................................................................................................16
Table 1-8 CD AS – Asia................................................................................................................................17
Table 1-9 Documentation availability............................................................................................................18
Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.....................................................28
Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional
communication in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003..................................31
Table 2-3 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share.........................................................32
Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments ........................................................................33
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration .......................................................36
Table 2-6 Color access control tools.............................................................................................................38
Table 2-7 Printer Usage Report....................................................................................................................56
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer..............................103
Table 3-2 Page orientation..........................................................................................................................109
Table 3-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks...............................................................123
Table 3-4 Name drop-down menu text strings............................................................................................128
Table 3-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes .........................................................................................................129
Table 3-6 Close dialog-box text strings.......................................................................................................130
Table 3-7 Printer-model configuration settings............................................................................................158
Table 3-8 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings..................................................................................160
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer..............................209
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes..........................................................................................................215
Table 4-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks...............................................................231
Table 4-4 Page orientation..........................................................................................................................236
Table 4-5 Driver mopier mode and collation settings .................................................................................264
Table 5-1 Default fonts................................................................................................................................268
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts.....................................................................................................270
Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems.......................................................................317
Table 7-1 HP Color LaserJet 3800 media sources and destinations .........................................................339
Table 7-2 Media-source commands ...........................................................................................................339
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes.........................................................................................340
Table 7-4 Supported input media types......................................................................................................341
Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes .........................................................................................................342
Table 7-6 Media-type commands................................................................................................................343
Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update ............................................................................................345
ENWW xv
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure .................................................................................345
Table 7-9 Update messages.......................................................................................................................346
Table 7-10 Driver support for the job-stream output feature.........................................................................362
Table 7-11 PCL 6 color raster compression support ....................................................................................362
Table 7-12 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding..........................................................................363
Table 7-13 Driver support for job tracking.....................................................................................................363
Table 7-14 Driver support for connectivity features ......................................................................................364
Table 7-15 Driver support for the bidirectional communication features ......................................................364
Table 7-16 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration ............................................................................365
Table 7-17 Bundle support............................................................................................................................365
Table 7-18 Tray and paper assignment........................................................................................................366
Table 7-19 Driver support for installable options...........................................................................................366
Table 7-20 Printer services (Services tab)....................................................................................................367
Table 7-21 Driver support for UI features......................................................................................................367
Table 7-22 Driver support for Help features..................................................................................................367
Table 7-23 Driver support for Print Task Quick Sets.....................................................................................368
Table 7-24 Driver support for media sizes....................................................................................................368
Table 7-25 Driver support for media types....................................................................................................369
Table 7-26 Driver support for the job-storage features ................................................................................369
Table 7-27 Print-quality and resolution features ...........................................................................................370
Table 7-28 Driver support for the reordering options....................................................................................370
Table 7-29 Resizing options..........................................................................................................................371
Table 7-30 Color settings..............................................................................................................................371
Table 7-31 Driver support for watermarks feature ........................................................................................372
Table 7-32 Driver support for the alternate source/paper type feature.........................................................372
Table 7-33 Driver support for the printing-destination feature.......................................................................373
Table 7-34 Duplexing....................................................................................................................................373
Table 7-35 Other document options..............................................................................................................373
Table 7-36 Font support................................................................................................................................374
Table 7-37 Driver support for postscript-specific features ............................................................................374
xvi ENWW
List of figures
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD printer-documentation screen................................................................18
Figure 2-1 Installation software CD browser..................................................................................................25
Figure 2-2 My HP Printers screen..................................................................................................................44
Figure 2-3 Step 1 of 3: Start Search screen...................................................................................................45
Figure 2-4 Advanced Search Settings screen................................................................................................45
Figure 2-5 Searching for printers, please wait.. screen..................................................................................46
Figure 2-6 Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found screen.......................................................................................46
Figure 2-7 Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen................................................................................................47
Figure 2-8 Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen........................................................................................47
Figure 2-9 Alert Settings screen.....................................................................................................................48
Figure 2-10 MY HP Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer......................................................................49
Figure 2-11 Overview tab.................................................................................................................................50
Figure 2-12 HP Easy Printer Care Help screen................................................................................................51
Figure 2-13 Supplies Ordering screen..............................................................................................................52
Figure 2-14 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen...........................................................52
Figure 2-15 Welcome to HP SureSupply screen..............................................................................................53
Figure 2-16 Support tab....................................................................................................................................54
Figure 2-17 Support Help screen.....................................................................................................................55
Figure 2-18 Welcome to HP Software Update screen......................................................................................57
Figure 2-19 Checking for updates… screen.....................................................................................................57
Figure 2-20 HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen.........................................................................62
Figure 2-21 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 1 of 3.....................................................63
Figure 2-22 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 2 of 3.....................................................64
Figure 2-23 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 3 of 3.....................................................64
Figure 2-24 HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen.........................................................................66
Figure 2-25 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 1 of 2................................................................................67
Figure 2-26 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 2 of 2................................................................................68
Figure 2-27 HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen.......................................................................................69
Figure 2-28 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen....................................................................71
Figure 2-29 Select Printer screen – printer not selected..................................................................................74
Figure 2-30 Connection Type screen...............................................................................................................74
Figure 2-31 Select Printer screen – printer selected........................................................................................75
Figure 2-32 Printer Status screen.....................................................................................................................76
Figure 2-33 Supplies Status screen.................................................................................................................76
Figure 2-34 Supplies Information screen..........................................................................................................77
Figure 2-35 Order Supplies link........................................................................................................................77
Figure 2-36 Paper Status screen......................................................................................................................78
Figure 2-37 Device Information screen............................................................................................................79
Figure 2-38 HP Online Support screen............................................................................................................79
Figure 2-39 HP Instant Support link.................................................................................................................80
ENWW xvii
Figure 2-40 Upload Fonts screen.....................................................................................................................81
Figure 2-41 File Upload screen........................................................................................................................82
Figure 2-42 Print Color Usage Job Log screen................................................................................................83
Figure 2-43 Trays Configuration screen...........................................................................................................84
Figure 2-44 Lock Resources screen.................................................................................................................85
Figure 2-45 Enable Job Storing screen............................................................................................................86
Figure 2-46 E-mail Alerts screen......................................................................................................................87
Figure 2-47 IP Settings screen.........................................................................................................................87
Figure 2-48 Rendezvous screen......................................................................................................................88
Figure 2-49 Replace Supplies screen..............................................................................................................89
Figure 2-50 Restrict Color Use screen.............................................................................................................90
Figure 2-51 Restrict Color Use – User tab.......................................................................................................91
Figure 2-52 Restrict Color – new user..............................................................................................................91
Figure 2-53 Restrict Color Use – Application tab.............................................................................................92
Figure 2-54 Restrict Color – new user..............................................................................................................92
Figure 2-55 Additional Settings screen.............................................................................................................93
Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button...........................................................................99
Figure 3-2 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon.......................................................................................100
Figure 3-3 The default Finishing tab.............................................................................................................101
Figure 3-4 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box.................................................................................108
Figure 3-5 Printing a booklet........................................................................................................................110
Figure 3-6 Page-order preview images .......................................................................................................111
Figure 3-7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver...........................................112
Figure 3-8 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver...........................................114
Figure 3-9 Effects tab...................................................................................................................................116
Figure 3-10 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right).......................................117
Figure 3-11 Watermark Details dialog box.....................................................................................................120
Figure 3-12 Paper tab ....................................................................................................................................124
Figure 3-13 Paper Options group box (default)..............................................................................................125
Figure 3-14 Custom Paper Size dialog box....................................................................................................126
Figure 3-15 Front Cover options.....................................................................................................................132
Figure 3-16 First Page options ......................................................................................................................133
Figure 3-17 Other Pages options...................................................................................................................134
Figure 3-18 Last Page options.......................................................................................................................135
Figure 3-19 Back Cover setting......................................................................................................................135
Figure 3-20 Job Storage tab...........................................................................................................................140
Figure 3-21 Basics tab....................................................................................................................................146
Figure 3-22 About This Driver dialog box.......................................................................................................148
Figure 3-23 Color tab......................................................................................................................................150
Figure 3-24 Color Settings dialog box............................................................................................................152
Figure 3-25 Configure tab...............................................................................................................................157
Figure 3-26 More Configuration Options dialog box ......................................................................................161
Figure 3-27 Configure Font Cards dialog box................................................................................................162
Figure 3-28 Paper tab.....................................................................................................................................167
Figure 3-29 Custom-designed size dialog box...............................................................................................168
Figure 3-30 Page dimensions in inches.........................................................................................................169
Figure 3-31 Unprintable Area dialog box........................................................................................................170
Figure 3-32 More Paper Options dialog box...................................................................................................170
Figure 3-33 About dialog box.........................................................................................................................171
Figure 3-34 Graphics tab................................................................................................................................172
xviii ENWW
Figure 3-35 Image Color Management dialog box.........................................................................................173
Figure 3-36 Fonts tab.....................................................................................................................................174
Figure 3-37 Font Substitution Table ..............................................................................................................175
Figure 3-38 Send Fonts As… dialog box........................................................................................................175
Figure 3-39 Device Options tab......................................................................................................................177
Figure 3-40 PostScript tab..............................................................................................................................190
Figure 3-41 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box....................................................................................192
Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message....................................................................................200
Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab ............................................................................201
Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab........................................................................................................................207
Figure 4-4 Paper Options group box............................................................................................................212
Figure 4-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box....................................................................................................214
Figure 4-6 Front Cover options.....................................................................................................................217
Figure 4-7 First Page options.......................................................................................................................219
Figure 4-8 Other Pages options...................................................................................................................220
Figure 4-9 Last Page options.......................................................................................................................221
Figure 4-10 Back Cover options.....................................................................................................................222
Figure 4-11 HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box........................................................................................223
Figure 4-12 Effects tab...................................................................................................................................225
Figure 4-13 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ......................................227
Figure 4-14 Watermark Details dialog box.....................................................................................................228
Figure 4-15 Finishing tab................................................................................................................................232
Figure 4-16 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box.................................................................................235
Figure 4-17 Page-order preview images .......................................................................................................238
Figure 4-18 Job Storage tab...........................................................................................................................242
Figure 4-19 Color tab......................................................................................................................................248
Figure 4-20 Color Settings dialog box............................................................................................................250
Figure 4-21 Services tab................................................................................................................................254
Figure 4-22 Device Settings tab.....................................................................................................................256
Figure 4-23 Font Substitution Table ..............................................................................................................258
Figure 4-24 HP Font Installer dialog box .......................................................................................................259
Figure 4-25 About tab.....................................................................................................................................266
Figure 5-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box......................................................275
Figure 5-2 Cancel dialog box........................................................................................................................275
Figure 5-3 Language Selection dialog box...................................................................................................276
Figure 5-4 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Setup Wizard dialog box ...........................................277
Figure 5-5 Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System...........................................................................277
Figure 5-6 Software License Agreement dialog box.....................................................................................278
Figure 5-7 Printer Connection dialog box.....................................................................................................278
Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box...................................................................................................................279
Figure 5-9 Firewall Detected dialog box.......................................................................................................280
Figure 5-10 Printer Not Found dialog box......................................................................................................281
Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box...........................................................................................................282
Figure 5-12 Printer Found dialog box.............................................................................................................283
Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box..........................................................................................283
Figure 5-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box..........................................................................................284
Figure 5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box..........................................................................................285
Figure 5-16 Specify Printer dialog box...........................................................................................................285
Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box..........................................................................................................286
Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box...........................................................................................................287
ENWW xix
Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box............................................................................................288
Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box.........................................................................................................288
Figure 5-21 Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................................289
Figure 5-22 Driver Details dialog box.............................................................................................................290
Figure 5-23 Additional Software dialog box....................................................................................................290
Figure 5-24 Additional software Details dialog box........................................................................................291
Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box .........................................................................................................292
Figure 5-26 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab......................................................................................................292
Figure 5-27 Printer Properties Sharing tab.....................................................................................................293
Figure 5-28 Additional Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................294
Figure 5-29 Installing dialog box.....................................................................................................................294
Figure 5-30 Finish dialog box.........................................................................................................................295
Figure 5-31 HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box..........................................................................295
Figure 5-32 Test Page dialog box..................................................................................................................296
Figure 5-33 HP Registration screen...............................................................................................................297
Figure 5-34 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard screen..................299
Figure 5-35 Language Selection dialog box...................................................................................................299
Figure 5-36 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box..................................................................300
Figure 5-37 Language dialog box...................................................................................................................300
Figure 5-38 Printer Port dialog box.................................................................................................................301
Figure 5-39 Browse for Printer dialog box......................................................................................................302
Figure 5-40 Printer Connection dialog box.....................................................................................................302
Figure 5-41 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box...................................................................................................303
Figure 5-42 Port Creation Options dialog box................................................................................................304
Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................................304
Figure 5-44 Driver Details dialog box.............................................................................................................305
Figure 5-45 Additional Software dialog box....................................................................................................306
Figure 5-46 Additional software Details dialog box........................................................................................306
Figure 5-47 Custom Installer Location dialog box..........................................................................................307
Figure 5-48 Ready to Create Installer dialog box...........................................................................................307
Figure 5-49 Printer Properties General tab....................................................................................................308
Figure 5-50 Printer Properties Sharing tab.....................................................................................................309
Figure 5-51 Additional Drivers dialog box.......................................................................................................309
Figure 5-52 Installing dialog box.....................................................................................................................310
Figure 5-53 Finish dialog box.........................................................................................................................310
Figure 6-1 Printer Browser screen................................................................................................................318
Figure 6-2 Installable Options screen...........................................................................................................319
Figure 6-3 Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab............................................................................321
Figure 6-4 More Printers screen...................................................................................................................322
Figure 6-5 IP Printer tab...............................................................................................................................323
Figure 6-6 Printer List screen.......................................................................................................................324
Figure 6-7 Select Printer screen...................................................................................................................325
Figure 6-8 hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon.................................................................................................330
Figure 6-9 hp LaserJet Software screen......................................................................................................330
Figure 6-10 HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon............................................................................................331
Figure 6-11 Authenticate dialog box...............................................................................................................331
Figure 6-12 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup-screen dialog box ..................................................331
Figure 6-13 License dialog box......................................................................................................................332
Figure 6-14 Easy Install dialog box................................................................................................................332
Figure 6-15 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install) .......................................................................333
xx ENWW
Figure 6-16 Installing dialog box ....................................................................................................................333
Figure 6-17 LaserJet ReadMe icon................................................................................................................334
Figure 6-18 Installation success message.....................................................................................................334
Figure 7-1 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached........................................................337
ENWW xxi
xxii ENWW
1 Purpose and scope
Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software.
This STR is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care Center
(CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS)
personnel, and HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer end users, as appropriate.
The following information is included in this STR:
●Descriptions of drivers and platforms, with system modifications
●Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components
●Descriptions of various topics that are associated with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer,
including engineering details
The following table describes the structure of this STR.
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview
Chapter Content
Chapter 1, Purpose and scope This chapter contains basic information about the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
and its software:
●Overview of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
●Printing-system software overview, including the following topics:
●System requirements
●Supported operating systems
●Availability
●HP LaserJet software documentation
Chapter 2, Software description This chapter provides an overview of the printing-system software installer and
print drivers.
This chapter also contains general information about other software features,
including the following topics:
●Driver configuration for Windows®
●HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
ENWW Introduction 1
Purpose and scope
Chapter Content
●International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles
●PANTONE*® color profiles
●HP Easy Printer Care (a new HP software feature for Windows operating
systems)
●HP Embedded Web Server
●HP Printer Utility for Macintosh (a new HP software feature for Mac OS X)
●HP Web Jetadmin
Chapter 3, HP traditional print drivers for
Windows
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5,
and postscript emulation print drivers for Windows 98 and Windows Millennium
Edition (Windows Me).
This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when
printing, including the following topics:
●Releasing a job-storage print job
●Deleting a job-storage print job
Chapter 4, HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS
emulation unidrivers for Windows
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5,
and postscript emulation print unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when
printing, including the following topics:
●Releasing a job-storage print job
●Deleting a job-storage print job
Chapter 5, Installing Windows printing-
system components
This chapter provides instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
in Windows operating systems by using various installation methods.
Chapter 6, Installation for Macintosh
operating systems
This chapter provides Instructions for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
in Macintosh operating systems.
Chapter 7, Engineering details This chapter contains information about the following special topics:
●File to E-mail utility
●HP Easy Printer Care
●Media attributes
●Remote firmware update
●Printing print-ready documents
●Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
For additional information about the location of information within these chapters, see the table of
contents. An index is provided in the back of this STR.
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview (continued)
2 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Additional detailed information about the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software is published
in an addendum to this STR. The following information is available only in the addendum:
●Lists of installed files
●System-modification information, such as changes to the registry and registry keys
●Descriptions of known software issues and solutions
ENWW Introduction 3
Purpose and scope
HP Color LaserJet 3800
The following table contains descriptions of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features that are
discussed in this STR. Product configurations might vary among countries/regions.
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features
Models ●Base model: HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (part
number Q5982A)
●HP Color LaserJet 3800n printer (part number Q5983A)
●HP Color LaserJet 3800dn printer (part number Q5984A)
●HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer (part number
Q5985A)
Performance ●
Prints up to 22 pages per minute (ppm) for letter-sized
paper and up to 21 ppm for A4-sized paper in
monochrome and up to 15 ppm in color.
●First page prints in 12.5 seconds or less. The printer can
be set to wake from sleep mode at a specific time each
day.
Memory ●64 megabytes (MB) of memory for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800; 128 MB for the HP Color
LaserJet 3800n; and 256 MB for the HP Color
LaserJet 3800dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn
printer models.
Memory specification: The HP Color LaserJet 3800
printer uses 200-pin small outline dual inline memory
modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of
random-access memory (RAM).
●Two open EIO slots
●Can be expanded to 512 MB of double data-rate
synchronous random access memory (DDR-SRAM) plus
32 MB of memory on the formatter board
●Optional hard-disk drive can be added in an EIO slot
User interface ●Two-line back-lit graphical display on control panel
●Enhanced Help with animated graphics
●Embedded Web server to gain access to support and
order supplies (network-connected printers)
Supported printer personalities ●HP PCL 6
●HP PCL 5c
●PostScript® (PS) 3 emulation
●Portable document format (PDF)
Hard-disk features ●Full job-storage features
●Proof and hold
●Private jobs
4 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
●Quick copy
●Stored jobs
●Mopier mode
●Personal identification number (PIN) printing
●Fonts and forms
Environmental features ●Sleep-mode setting
●High content of recyclable components and materials
●Energy Star® compliant
●Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive
compliant
Fonts ●Internal fonts are available for both printer command
language (PCL) and postscript emulation.
●Printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType® format are
available on the printing-system software CD
●HP Web Jetadmin-supported forms and fonts are on the
disk.
Paper handling ●Prints on media sizes from 148 mm x 210 mm (5.83
inches x 8.27 inches) up to 216 mm x 356 mm
(8.5 inches x 14 inches) (Legal size)
●Tray 1 can process heavy-weight media from 60 g/m
2
to
220 g/m
2
(16 lb to 60 lb), as well as standard 80-lb cover
stock.
●Tray 2 and the optional trays can process media up to
120 g/m
2
(32 lb) in weight
●Prints on a wide range of media types, including HP photo
media, glossy papers, transparencies, heavy stock,
labels, and envelopes
●Features adjustable gloss level on page by choosing the
appropriate glossy-media type
●Standard 100-sheet multipurpose paper tray (tray 1)
supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS),
Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media
●Standard 250-sheet paper feeder (tray 2) supports Letter,
Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4,
and custom media
●Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) supports
Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS),
Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media
●Standard 250-sheet face-down output bin
●The duplexing unit for automatic two-sided printing
(duplexing) is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 3800dn
and HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printers.
●Automatic duplexing of 120-g/m
2
(32-lb) paper at full
speed produces up to 30 sides (15 sheets) per minute.
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features (continued)
ENWW HP Color LaserJet 3800 5
Purpose and scope
Accessories ●Optional printer hard disk, which provides storage for
fonts and macros as well as additional features for job
storage
●Dual inline memory modules (DIMM)
●Flash memory slots for additional fonts and firmware
upgrades
●Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3)
Connectivity ●Enhanced input/output (EIO) card slots for optional
connectivity (Network connection through an
HP Jetdirect embedded print server is standard on the
HP Color LaserJet 3800n, HP Color LaserJet 3800dn,
and HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn models.)
●Universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection
●HP Jetdirect embedded print server for network
connectivity without using an EIO slot
●Bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE 1284B-
compliant); available with the optional 1284B parallel EIO
card (part number J7972G)
Supplies ●The supplies status page contains information about
toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining.
●High-capacity no-shake cartridge with automatic toner-
seal removal feature
●The printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges when
a cartridge is installed.
●Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the
HP Embedded Web Server
Table 1-2 HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features (continued)
6 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Printing-system software
This section contains information about the following topics:
●System requirements
●Supported operating systems
●Availability
System requirements
The section lists system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-
system software on each of these supported operating systems:
●Windows
●Macintosh
●Linux
●UNIX
Windows
●Pentium® or compatible processor
●Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows 2000: 333-MHz processor with 64 MB RAM
Windows XP: 333-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM
●Windows Server 2003: 550-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM (Standard Edition) and 220 MB of
available hard-disk space
●Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640x480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])
●Onboard parallel port, USB port, or network connection
●CD-ROM drive or internet connection
Macintosh
●PowerPC processor
●Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), with 96 MB RAM
●Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later, with 128 MB RAM and 160 MB of available hard-disk space
●CD-ROM drive or internet connection
Linux
For information about Linux support for the printer, see the following HP Linux Web site:
●www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting
ENWW Printing-system software 7
Purpose and scope
UNIX
For information about UNIX® support for the printer, see the following Web sites:
●www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
●www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts
Supported operating systems
Windows operating systems provide full-featured support for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
Operating systems that are not described in this STR provide varying levels of functionality.
Throughout this STR, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP
Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise.
Information relating to networking functions is specific to products that have network capabilities.
If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit
print driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 has not been tested with and is not supported in the Windows 3.1x or
Windows 95 operating systems.
The Windows NT® 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. Print
drivers for the product are not included on the printing-system software CD and are not available on the
Web. Other drivers might work on the printer, but some print-driver features and functions might not be
available.
For more information about the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj3800
Standalone drivers
The following operating systems support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software,
including the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers and unidrivers:
●Windows 98
●Windows Me
●Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2)
●Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit)
●Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 1 and later; 32-bit and 64-bit)
●Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Print driver support in other operating systems
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is also supported in the following operating environments:
●Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic)
●Mac OS X (V10.1.5 or later)
●Linux. For more information, go to the following Web site:
8 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting
●UNIX. For more information, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
●UNIX model scripts. Available only on the Web at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.
●Windows Terminal Server
●Citrix Terminal Server. For more information, go to the following Web site:
h20000.ww2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Document.jsp
Alternatively, go to the HP.com Web site and search for “c00213455”.
●Windows Cluster Server 8
●HP OpenVMS. For more information, go to the following Web site:
h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/
●Tru64 UNIX printing. For more information, go to the following Web site:
h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/
●SAP printing. For more information, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/sap/print
●HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). Available only on the Web at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/inpw_software
Availability
This section provides information about the availability of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system
software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available from
HP fulfillment centers.
Printing-system software on the Web
All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers an option
for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This
STR does not describe any drivers that might be released for use by support personnel.
Printing-system software
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software is available for download at www.hp.com/go/
clj3800_software.
ENWW Printing-system software 9
Purpose and scope
NOTE Only 32-bit print drivers are available on the printing-system software CD. If the computer
is running a 64-bit operating system, you must install a 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers
for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available on the Web at www.hp.com/go/
clj3800_software.
For information about driver support in various operating systems, see Supported operating
systems.
For more information about installing print drivers for Windows, see Installing Windows printing-
system components.
Software component availability
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.
These drivers are available at the HP Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software
NOTE All of the listed components are available both on the printing-system software CD and
on the Web, except for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit drivers and components,
which are available only on the Web.
Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
Component Windows 98
and
Windows Me
Windows 2000,
Windows Server
2003, and
Windows XP (32-
bit)
Windows XP
and
Windows Server
2003 (64-bit)
Macintosh
Drivers
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver
x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver,
and HP PCL 5 Unidriver
x x
PS Emulation Unidriver x x
PS Emulation Driver (Windows 98 and
Windows Me)
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x
Installer
Common Windows Installer x x
Installer Customization Wizard x x
CD Browser x x
Add Printer Wizard install x x x
Web Registration x x
Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) postscript
printer definition (PPD) files
x
Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later x
10 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
NOTE The HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver is a new driver. It has not been available on legacy HP
LaserJet products.
In-box printing-system software CDs
The software CD for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer contains a variety of files for installing the
printing-system software on the computer. This section describes the files that are available on the
software CD and provides additional information about support and availability.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD is divided into two partitions, one for each of
the following operating systems:
●Windows
●Macintosh
The files in each partition include documentation files and files that are required in order to install and
uninstall the printing-system components.
HP LaserJet software CD, Windows partition
The root directory in the Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file, the
SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files:
●Autorun
●Drivers
●Fonts
●HP Easy Printer Care
●HP Print Usage Report
●hw
●Manuals
●PortMonitor
●System32
●Temp
●WebReg
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
●Drivers
●Manuals
NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
To view the files, insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD, right-click Start, click
Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive.
ENWW Printing-system software 11
Purpose and scope
HP LaserJet software CD, Macintosh partition
The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD are grouped by language
and reside in the following directories:
●Mac OS X (installer for the Mac OS X operating system)
●Mac OS 9 (installer for the Mac OS 9 operating system)
●PDF
NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD.
CD versions
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD is available in five versions, each of which
contains printing-system software in various languages, as follows:
●CD AM – Americas and Europe (Part No. Q5982-60101):
●CA = Catalan (Català)
●DE = German (Deutsch)
●EN = English
●ES = Spanish (Español)
●FR = French (Français)
●IT = Italian (Italiano)
●NL = Dutch (Nederland)
●PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
●CD WE – Western Europe (Part No. Q5982-60102):
●DA = Danish (Dansk)
●EN = English
●FI = Finnish (Suomi)
●HE = Hebrew
●NO = Norwegian (Norsk)
●SV = Swedish (Svenska)
●CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (Part No. Q5982-60103):
●AR = Arabic
●EN = English
●EL = Greek
●FR = French (Français)
12 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
●RU = Russian (Russ)
●TR = Turkish (Turkçe)
●CD EE – Eastern Europe (Part No. Q5982-60104):
●CS = Czech (Cesky)
●EN = English
●HU = Hungarian (Magyar)
●PL = Polish (Polski)
●SK = Slovak
●CD AS – Asia (Part No. Q5982-60105):
●EN = English
●ID = Indonesian (Bahasa)
●JA = Japanese
●KO = Korean
●TH = Thai
●ZHCN = Simplified Chinese
●ZHTW = Traditional Chinese
Each of the following tables lists one of the software CD versions, along with the printing-system software
components that are supported in each language.
NOTE Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/
regions. European languages, for instance, are distributed on three CDs.
Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe
Component CA DE EN ES FR IT NL PT
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver
x x x x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x x x
HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x x x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x x x
PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x x x
Common Windows Installer x x x x x x x x
Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x x
Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x x
ENWW Printing-system software 13
Purpose and scope
Component CA DE EN ES FR IT NL PT
CD Browser x x x x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x x x x x x x
Printer Usage Report x x x x x x x
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x x x x x x x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x x
Fonts x x x x x x x
HP Web Registration x x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3
800 User Guide (.PDF file)
x x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3
800 User Guide (.CHM file)
x x x x x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide
x x x x x x x
Hewlett-Packard Color
LaserJet 3000/3600/3800
Printing-System Install Notes
x x x x x x x x
HP Embedded Web Server User
Guide
x x xxxxx
Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe
Component DA EN FI HE NO SV
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation
Driver
x x x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x
HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x
PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x
Common Windows Installer x x x x x x
Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x
Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x
CD Browser x x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x x x x
Printer Usage Report x x x x
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x x x x x
Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe (continued)
14 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Component DA EN FI HE NO SV
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x
Fonts x x x x x
HP Web Registration x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User
Guide (.PDF file)
x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User
Guide (.CHM file)
x x x x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x
Hewlett-Packard Color
LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-
System Install Notes
x x x x x x
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x x x
Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian
Component AR EN EL FR RU TR
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver
x x x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x
HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x
PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x
Common Windows Installer x x x x x x
Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x
Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x
CD Browser x x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x x
Printer Usage Report x x
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x
Fonts x x x x
HP Web Registration x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800
User Guide (.PDF file)
xxxxxx
Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe (continued)
ENWW Printing-system software 15
Purpose and scope
Component AR EN EL FR RU TR
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800
User Guide (.CHM file)
x x x x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x
Hewlett-Packard Color
LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-
System Install Notes
x x x x x x
HP Embedded Web Server User
Guide
x x
Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe
Component CS EN HU PL SK
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation
Driver
x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x
HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x
PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x
Common Windows Installer x x x x x
Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x
Installer Customization Wizard x x x x
CD Browser x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x x
Printer Usage Report x x
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x
Fonts x x x x
HP Web Registration x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800
User Guide (.PDF file)
x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800
User Guide (.CHM file)
x x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x
Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (continued)
16 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Component CS EN HU PL SK
Hewlett-Packard Color
LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-
System Install Notes
x x x x x
HP Embedded Web Server User
Guide
x
Table 1-8 CD AS – Asia
Component EN ID JA KO TH ZHCN ZHTW
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation
Driver
x x x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x
HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x
HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x
HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x
PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x
Common Windows Installer x x x x x x
Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x
Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x
CD Browser x x x x x x
HP Easy Printer Care x
Printer Usage Report x
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh x x x x x
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x
Fonts x
HP Web Registration x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800
User Guide (.PDF file)
x x x x x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800
User Guide (.CHM file)
x x x x x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x
Hewlett-Packard Color
LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-
System Install Notes
x x x x x x
HP Embedded Web Server User
Guide
x
Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe (continued)
ENWW Printing-system software 17
Purpose and scope
HP LaserJet documentation
The following figure shows the printer-documentation screen, which appears when you click Printer
Documentation on the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD.
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD printer-documentation screen
The following table lists the availability of HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system documentation by
operating system.
Table 1-9 Documentation availability
Document Windows 98/
Me
Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003
Macintosh
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide (.CHM file) x x
Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System
Install Notes
x x
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide xx x
18 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location:
●Some documents can be opened from the CD Browser.
●Some documents appear on the software CD and can be opened by navigating to the folder where
they reside.
●Some documents are available on the Web through links in the CD Browser or CD folders.
Documents are available in the following file formats:
●Portable Document Format (.PDF). The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD
includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation.
●Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft
HTML Viewer opens the file on the computer screen.
●Hypertext Markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web
browser opens the file on the computer screen.
●Rich Text format (.RTF). This is a text file. You can navigate to files and open them in Microsoft
Word or Microsoft WordPad.
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide
The HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide describes the basic product features.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click User Guide (Interactive).
The guide opens as a Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the guide is
provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ3800_USE_XXWW.CHM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the guide is CLJ3800_USE_FRWW.CHM
The HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide is provided as a .PDF file, which you can print. To
print the guide, follow these steps:
1. In the CD Browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click User Guide (Printer Friendly). The guide opens.
3. Print the guide.
ENWW HP LaserJet documentation 19
Purpose and scope
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ3800_USE_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the guide is CLJ3800_USE_FRWW.PDF
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System
Install Notes
The Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes (in .HTM format)
contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-system
software, and technical assistance.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click Install Notes.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ3800_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the document is CLJ3800_INSTALL-NOTE_FRWW.HTM.
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device status,
settings, and networking for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click Embedded Web Server Guide.
20 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
CLJ3800_EWS_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
CLJ3800_EWS_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that contains
information about connecting the product directly to a network.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation.
2. Click HP Jetdirect Guide.
You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF
NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF.
When you have the file open, you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to
another location.
ENWW HP LaserJet documentation 21
Purpose and scope
22 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW
2 Software description
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and
Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is
available on the Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, see
the section that corresponds to that system.
NOTE The HP Toolbox is not available on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●Printing-system software
●Driver Configuration for Windows
●HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
●Color Access Control
●International Color Consortium profiles
●PANTONE color profiles
●HP Easy Printer Care
●HP Embedded Web Server
●HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
●HP Web Jetadmin
ENWW Introduction 23
Software description
Printing-system software
This section contains information about the following topics:
●Windows software features
●Macintosh printing-system software
Windows software features
This section contains information about the following topics:
●Printing system and installer
●HP LaserJet print drivers
Printing system and installer
The following sections contain information about the printing-system software and the installer on the
software CD that came with the product.
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD for Windows systems
For the Microsoft Windows environment (Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me),
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003), the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system
software CD provides an interactive CD browser that you can use to install the print drivers and related
components, and to gain access to online user documentation, a customization utility, Adobe® Acrobat®
Reader software, and optional HP software.
The following figure shows the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software
CD, which appears when you insert the printing-system software CD in a CD-ROM drive. If the screen
does not appear when you insert the software CD, follow these steps to open the CD browser:
1. Click Start.
2. Click Run.
3. Click Browse…. and navigate to the root directory of the software CD.
4. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start the installer.
24 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-1 Installation software CD browser
The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel and
documentation options in the lower-left panel. As you move the cursor over each option, a description
of the option appears above the product image.
NOTE The options on your product might differ from the illustration.
Install Printer. The installation wizard guides you through the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system
software installation. You are given the choice of performing a Basic Installation, a Full Installation, or
a Custom Installation. If you select Basic Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you
select Custom Installation, you can select the components that you want to install.
Installer Customization Wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP Color LaserJet 3800 installer by
presetting the installation options in a response file. The installer that you have customized can then be
used for silent, unattended installation.
HP Easy Printer Care Software. Use this option to install the HP Easy Printer Care. This printer
maintenance tool helps track and maintain the printers by providing information about status, alert
notifications, usage, and supplies for one or more printers.
Register Product. Use this option to register your product online. After Web registration, you can gain
access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts, driver notices,
and personalized newsletters.
ENWW Printing-system software 25
Software description
Printer Documentation. Use this option to view the HP Color LaserJet 3800 user documentation. The
following document options are available when you click this option:
●User Guide (Interactive)
●User Guide (Printer Friendly)
●Install Notes
●Embedded Web Server Guide
●HP Jetdirect Guide
●Color Printing Access and Usage
NOTE If the system on which you are installing the product does not have Adobe Acrobat
Reader 4.0 or later installed, click any of the links to documentation that is in portable document
format (.PDF) to open a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader that runs from the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD. The CD Browser version of Acrobat
Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized versions of .PDF documents. The
Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on the computer and can only run while the
printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available at
the following Web site: www.adobe.com.
Support. To increase productivity and get the most use from your HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, you
can view a list of optional software programs and links to HP Web sites. The following options are
available:
●Click HP Web Jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web browser-
based network-management tool.
●Click Color Printing Access and Usage to enable or disable color printing and to track color
usage.
●Click Color Matching Information for information about simulating PANTONE* MATCHING
SYSTEM colors and installing International Color Consortium (ICC) color profiles for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
●Click Supplies for information about ordering HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supplies.
●Click Product Information for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer support information and updates.
●Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services, support,
drivers, and HP online stores.
Installer features
The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the product.
The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
26 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
The common installer offers the following features:
●The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD features an interactive software
interface. See HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD for Windows systems.
●Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a networked product
in a single process.
●The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You
can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system
software CD.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD also includes the following features:
●The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility
●The HP Customization Utility for custom installations
All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP Color LaserJet 3800 series
printing-system installer. The installer automatically detects the language of choice and the operating
system. You can select the type of installation that you prefer: Basic Installation, Full Installation, or
Custom Installation.
HP LaserJet print drivers
HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers provide the printing features and communication between the
computer and the product. The printing system includes software for end users and network
administrators who are working in the following operating environments:
●Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows Me
●Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●Apple Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), and Mac OS X (V10.1.5 and later)
In Windows operating systems, automatic configuration, driver updates after a new configuration, and
preconfiguration features are available with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
NOTE For the latest information about the printing-system software components, see the
readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system software,
see the Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 Printing-System Install Notes on the
printing-system software CD.
All of the drivers provide access to the paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described in
chapters 3 and 4 of this STR.
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers
All of the Windows drivers are supported by Microsoft 32-bit operating systems. Separate versions of
the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers are available for Windows XP and
Windows Server 2003 64-bit operating systems. These 64-bit drivers are not included on the printing-
system software CD, but they can be downloaded from the following HP Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software
ENWW Printing-system software 27
Software description
The following drivers are available on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD:
●The HP PCL 6 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●HP PCL 5 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●The HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver (the PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98 and Windows Me
●The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver for Windows 98, and Windows Me
●The HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver (the PS Emulation Driver) for Windows 98 and
Windows Me
NOTE If you select a Full Installation during installation of the printing-system software, the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003, and the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default for
Windows 98 and Windows Me.
Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
Operating System
1
PCL 6 PCL 5 PS emulation
Windows 98 and Windows Me X X X
Windows 2000 X X X
Windows XP X X X
Windows Server 2003 X X X
Macintosh OS X
1
Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for information
about the features that are available.
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems
Access to print-driver version numbers varies, depending on the operating system in which the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is installed.
NOTE For a list of HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers, updated HP printing-system software,
and product-support information, go to:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software
The Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems support the HP PCL 6,
PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers. If you are using an HP unidriver in a Windows 2000, Windows XP,
or Windows Server 2003 environment, follow these steps to find driver-version information:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
28 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
3. Click Printers and Faxes (in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) or Printers (in Windows
2000).
4. Right-click the printer icon.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the About tab.
The Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 PCL 6 and
PCL 5 traditional print drivers and the PS Emulation Driver.
If you are using an HP traditional PCL driver, follow these steps to gain access to the print driver version
number:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
6. Click the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or
HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver tabs:
●Finishing
●Effects
●Paper
●Job Storage
●Basics
●Color
●Configure
The PS Emulation Driver software provides postscript feature support for the HP Color LaserJet 3800
printer. To gain access to the print-driver version number, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
6. Click About.
Macintosh printing-system software
This section discusses the following topics:
ENWW Printing-system software 29
Software description
●Mac OS 9 Classic support
●Macintosh printing system
Mac OS 9 Classic support
HP does not fully support Mac OS 9 (Mac OS X Classic). It is not a native operating system but a virtual
operating system running on top of Mac OS X (HP software is designed and tested for native operating
systems). Additionally, no support is offered for Virtual PC, which is also a virtual operating system.
Information that HP has about specific issues related to the Mac OS X Classic environment or print-
driver files can be relayed to customers.
At this time, support offered for Mac OS 9 Classic is on a "best effort" basis. HP understands that
because certain Apple computers might not offer native Mac OS 9, Classic is the only option. "Best
effort" support will attempt the following:
●Installation of the software and hardware
●Test installation to verify that the software and hardware work
●Limited troubleshooting
When problems arise within the Mac OS X Classic environment, HP uses the following resources to
resolve the problem:
●Internal resources, such as knowledge-base systems, engineers, and the resource desk
●Apple support
●The Web
●Known solutions
If these resources do not resolve the problem, contact Apple or the virtual-operating-system vendor.
While issues that occur with virtual operating systems are not supported, HP continues to offer full
support for its products in native Mac OS 9, where the supplied product software is designed to support
Mac OS 9 and is within the normal support period.
Macintosh printing system
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing system for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center for
Mac OS X (V10.1.5 and later) and the Apple LaserWriter driver for Mac OS 9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic),
which are provided with the operating system, and HP-created PPD files. The driver uses these files to
determine the features and postscript commands that the product supports. Bidirectional support in
AppleTalk connections supports autoconfiguration of the software. The following are components that
can be installed:
●The HP Color LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5
and later
●SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS (for Mac OS X Classic)
●LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X)
●The HP Printer Selector (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later)
●Install notes
30 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Driver Configuration for Windows
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional drivers for Windows and the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and
PS emulation unidrivers feature bidirectional communication technology which, in supported
environments, provide automatic discovery and driver configuration for product accessories at the time
of installation.
Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the duplexing unit, optional
paper trays, printer hard disk, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
Driver autoconfiguration
Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the
following circumstances:
●When a print driver is installed by using Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC)
●When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed
However, as shown in the following table, driver autoconfiguration and EAC are not available in
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems over a direct connection
when the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is installed by using the Add Printer Wizard.
Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Connection type Add Printer Wizard install Common installer
Network Yes Yes
Direct connection No Yes
Bidirectional communication
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the product
during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
Bidirectional communication is the capability of the product to respond to data inquiries from the
computer and report information back, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories
are connected to the product. Bidirectional communication depends on the network operating system
and on the type of connection that exists between the computer and the HP Color LaserJet 3800. If the
connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept
commands from the host and cannot report information back to the host computer.
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration
functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on the printing-
system software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that includes EAC
is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the product. Configuration occurs
without user interaction.
If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the pre-
existing bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver.
ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 31
Software description
If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectional-communication
software that allows it to communicate with the product and automatically match the print driver with the
actual product configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or whenever the Update
Now feature is used.
If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer configuration changes after installation, the driver can be
automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication by using the Update Now feature. For more information, see Update Now.
The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network
environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 2-3 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method Connection type Microsoft Windows Microsoft Share
1
98 Me NT 4.0 2000 XP 2000/XP
host with
2000/XP
client
NT 4.0
host with
NT 4.0
client
Installer Direct
connect
Parallel
USB
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP x x x x x x x
2
IPX/SPX x x x x x x x
2
Standard TCP/IP
(HP)
x x x x x x x
2
TCP/IP
(MS)
x x x x x x x
2
IPX/SPX
(HP)
x x x x x x x
2
Add
Printer
Direct
connect
Parallel
USB
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP x x x x x x
IPX/SPX x x x x x x x
2
Standard TCP/IP
(HP)
x x x x x x x
2
TCP/IP
(MS)
x x x x
2
IPX/SPX
(HP)
x x x x x x x
2
1
This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: 1. Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Server host
with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 2. Windows NT 4.0 host with Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 3. Windows 98 or Windows Me host with any client.
2
In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host.
32 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments
Method Connection type Novell
Netware 4.x Netware 5.x
Bindery
queue
NDS queue Bindery
queue
NT 4.0
Installer Direct connect Parallel
USB
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP x x x x
IPX/SPX
Standard TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP (MS
1
)
IPX/SPX (HP)
1
Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service for NetWare.
Update Now
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer since installation, the driver
can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
For example, if the product is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, use the
Update Now feature to query the product and update the settings to match the new product configuration.
The feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears
on the Configure tab if you are using an HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver,
and on the Device Settings tab if you are using an HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not available with the HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation
Driver.
To activate the Update Now feature if you are using an HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver,
follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click Device Settings.
7. If necessary, click Installable Options to expand it and show the options.
ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 33
Software description
8. In the Automatic Configuration drop-down menu, select Update Now.
9. Click OK to save the setting.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000
or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts.
To activate the Update Now feature if you are using an HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5 driver, follow
these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
6. Click Device Settings.
7. Click the Configure tab.
8. In the Automatic Configuration group box, click Update Now.
9. Click OK to save the setting.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system
software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments
can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the
network environment.
HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or
print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be configured:
●device settings
●printing-preferences settings
The driver is configured to match the product hardware so that access to all of the product accessories
through the driver is enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most
driver feature settings can also be configured.
HP Driver Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories that are installed on the
product, or to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example,
optional trays, total amount of memory, job-storage settings, or mopier settings).
The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps:
●driver acquisition
●driver preconfiguration
●driver installation and deployment
34 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define
the configuration.
The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All three
are designed with the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the .CFG file, but are
packaged differently, either to support established product installation workflows or to leave the
deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools support driver
preconfiguration:
●HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone
Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is associated
with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the
target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for
deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or HP Print Server
Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any ordinary Windows
software program is used.
The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw
●The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queue-
creation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows 2000, Windows XP,
or Windows Server 2003 or workstation. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin adds
a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers that are being
installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process. The plug-in is limited to Internet
Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported.
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/web_jetadminplugin.html
●HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer. The Customization Utility features an install-time mode
of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a
printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer.
For detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools, see the HP Driver
Preconfiguration Support Guide at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw
Lockable features
The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
●Print on Both Sides (duplex). The options are True or False.
●Print in Grayscale. The options are Disable or Enabled.
●Media Type. The options include all the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
supports (see Media attributes in the Engineering Details chapter).
●Paper Source. The options are Printer Auto Select, Manual Feed (Tray 1), Tray 1, or Tray 2.
When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.
Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been locked.
ENWW Driver Configuration for Windows 35
Software description
Continuous export
The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back to
the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be transferred
when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance, if the orientation
is set to Landscape in a driver originally installed in Windows 2000, then the orientation setting
automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to Windows XP or
Windows Server 2003. The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user's
perspective and works only between drivers of identical product models.
NOTE Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the exportable components
are always the same as the components that can be preconfigured.
The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration.
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration
Driver Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003
HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver
Yes Yes N/A
1
N/A N/A
HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver
Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A
PS Emulation
Driver
No No N/A N/A N/A
HP PCL 6
Unidriver
N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes
HP PCL 5
Unidriver
N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes
PS Emulation
Unidriver
N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes
1
N/A: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system.
36 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
The HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is a Web-based diagnostic software that you can use to
determine whether you are using the correct and most current print driver for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. Two methods are available to gain access to the HP Driver Diagnostic
Printer Check Tool:
1. Open an Internet browser.
2. Go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/drivercheck
1. Open an Internet browser.
2. Go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/bsc
3. Click the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar.
4. Click automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.
When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool runs, the products that are currently installed on the
computer appear in a list. When you select the HP product that you would like to check, the HP Driver
Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers information about your product, drivers, and system setup in
order to diagnose the software driver configuration and check the print driver. The tool then verifies
whether you are using the latest driver, informs you if you are using an incorrect driver for the HP product,
and lets you know if an updated driver version is available for the product. If an updated driver is
available, you can download and install the latest driver version by clicking it.
The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that HP can
analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools. No private data is gathered from the computer.
ENWW HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 37
Software description
Color Access Control
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 has the ability to monitor and control color print-job use. The following table
shows various tools that can be used to control color-printing access.
Table 2-6 Color access control tools
Tool Description
HP Embedded Web Server The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a Web-browser-
based utility that provides an interface to the printer that you
can use to change printer settings, including color access
control settings. No special software needs to be installed or
configured. It allows you to set color printing restrictions and
view a log of color printing use. The HP EWS is designed for
one-to-one printer configuration monitoring and management.
For more information, see HP Embedded Web Server in this
chapter.
HP Web Jetadmin The HP Web Jetadmin provides an interface to the printer
through a Web browser on single network-administration
servers. Use HP Web Jetadmin to manage HP Jetdirect-
connected products within an intranet.
For more information, see the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
Color usage job log The color usage job log shows color and monochrome print job
statistics for a printer.
For more information, see HP Easy Printer Care in this
chapter.
HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
operating environments, use the HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver
to limit the color printing capabilities of the
HP Color LaserJet 3800.
The HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver is a full-featured print driver.
For more information , see HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS
emulation unidrivers for Windows in this STR.
Product control panel Use the product control panel to restrict color use in network-
connected printers.
For more information, see the following procedure
To restrict color-printing access to a network-connected HP Color LaserJet 3800 from the product
control panel, follow these steps:
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press
.
3. Press and to scroll to SYSTEM SETUP, and then press .
38 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
4. Press and to scroll to RESTRICT COLOR USE, and then press .
5. Press and to scroll to one of the following options:
●ENABLE COLOR. This is the default setting. Use of color-printing features is unrestricted.
●COLOR IF ALLOWED. Network administrators can use this setting to allow color-printing to
certain users and restrict it for other users. User privileges can be set using HP EWS. For
more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
●DISABLE COLOR. This setting denies the use of color-printing features to all users.
ENWW Color Access Control 39
Software description
International Color Consortium profiles
HP provides cyan-magenta-yellow-black (CMYK) (HP3800C.ICM) and standard red-green-blue (sRGB)
(HP3800R.ICM) International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
The CMYK profile can only be used with a postscript driver; the sRGB profile can be used with any of
the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers. The profiles are available at the following HP Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj3800
The ICC profiles describe the way color will be interpreted in the default CMYK and RGB modes. These
profiles can be used for color conversions in a color-managed workflow. The sRGB profile matches the
default RGB mode (sRGB), which is enabled with the Default (sRGB) or Color setting in either a PCL
or postscript driver. The printer interprets CMYK data according to the Specifications for Web Offset
Publications (SWOP) simulation when Default CMYK+ is the selected CMYK Color setting in the
postscript driver, and a more accurate SWOP rendering can be produced by selecting the SWOP setting.
This standard defines how a particular set of CMYK ink colors should behave. Emulation for Dainippon
Press (DIC) and Euro-standard CMYK inks used in Asia and Europe are also available and can be
selected from the print driver.
40 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
PANTONE color profiles
Most software programs that support the use of PANTONE* colors for graphic objects will include the
PANTONE* name in the postscript output along with the color values that are assigned to the object.
For best results, select a software program that uses PANTONE* palette in a CMYK workspace, and
print with one of the following postscript drivers:
●PS Emulation Unidriver in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●PS Emulation Driver in Windows 98 and Windows Me
When SWOP is selected as the CMYK Color setting, these CMYK values provides a good reproduction
of the PANTONE* 4C spot-color simulations.
PANTONE* provides device- and software-specific palettes for some HP Color LaserJet products. Using
the custom colors in these palettes can provide an alternative match to the 4C spot-color simulation.
However, files that use these palettes are not portable to other devices.
PANTONE* Application Palettes are available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj3800
Vector graphics, such as company logos that are created in PANTONE* Application Palettes, can be
imported into Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, or other Microsoft Office software programs. The color
program must create an encapsulated postscript (.EPS) file of the image that will be imported. Use the
Insert file function to import the file into the Office document.
NOTE Cutting and pasting from the clipboard does not work. These tasks do not preserve the
PANTONE* name or the CMYK palette value.
ENWW PANTONE color profiles 41
Software description
HP Easy Printer Care
HP Easy Printer Care is a new standalone software program that manages from one to 15 printers. It
enables you to view the status of all HP printers, set up printer and status alerts, generate printer usage
reports, and reorder supplies.
NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the
following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
Installation options
The following methods are available for installing HP Easy Printer Care software:
●Standalone installation, from the Web. This method is recommended for ensuring that the latest
version of HP Easy Printer Care is installed. The software is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
●CD Browser. From the main installation screen of the software CD, select HP Easy Printer
Care. This method is recommended in cases where HP Easy Printer Care software is the only
component that you want to install.
NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at
the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
●Full installation. Select this path from the CD software installer. This method installs the full set
of drivers and software, including status, alerting, and troubleshooting tools (HP Easy Printer Care).
This method is recommended for computers in a direct-connect or a home/small network
environment.
NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at
the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
●Custom installation. Select this path from the CD software installer. HP Easy Printer Care is one
of the components that can be selected for installation.
NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at
the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
●Next Steps, during installation. After the drivers have been installed using the printing system
installer, a dialog appears that provides an opportunity to install HP Easy Printer Care, if it is not
already installed.
NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at
the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
42 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
To install HP Easy Printer Care directly from the printing-system software CD, follow these steps:
NOTE At this time, the HP Easy Printer Care Software is only available on the Web at the
following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare
1. Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click HP Easy Printer Care Software. The HP Easy Printer Care screen appears.
3. Click OK to proceed with the installation.
When you perform a default installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer over a direct USB or
parallel connection by using the printing-system software CD, HP Easy Printer Care is automatically
installed. Using this method, HP Easy Printer Care also discovers any HP printers that have been
installed on the computer over the network by selecting Find Other Printers on the left pane of the My
HP Printers screen.
When you install the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer over a direct USB or parallel connection that does
not use a DOT4 port (for instance, by using the Add Printer Wizard), HP Easy Printer Care does not
automatically discover the printer. For USB or parallel connections, the print driver must be installed by
using the printing-system software CD in order for the requires DOT4 port to be installed.
When you install the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer over a transmission control protocol/internet
protocol (TCP/IP) network connection by using the printing-system software CD, HP Easy Printer Care
is an option for a Custom Installation. It is not an option for a Basic Installation or a Full Installation over
a network.
HP Easy Printer Care is not supported over Novell Netware (IPX/SPX) network connections.
Access
To gain access to the HP Easy Printer Care, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select All Programs.
3. Select Hewlett-Packard.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 43
Software description
4. Select HP Easy Printer Care.
5. Click Start HP Easy Printer Care. The Easy Printer Care screen appears.
Figure 2-2 My HP Printers screen
If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected directly through a USB or parallel DOT4 port, an icon
for the product appears in the main pane of the Easy Printer Care screen (see Figure 2-10 MY HP
Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer).
If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected over a network, click Find Other Printers.
Find Other Printers
Click Find Other Printers on the left pane of the My HP Printers screen to open the Step 1 of 3: Start
Search screen.
44 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-3 Step 1 of 3: Start Search screen
If you know the TCP/IP address of the printer, type the address in the Search for field and then click
Next.
To conduct a search for printers over a network, select the General search (searches for all HP
printers on your network) option.
Click Advanced Search Properties to open a screen that you can use to select the number of “hops”
that the system makes. The Advanced Search Settings screen appears.
Click Cancel on this and on any other screen where it appears to return to the main HP Easy Printer
Care screen.
Figure 2-4 Advanced Search Settings screen
When you click Next on the Find Other Printers screen, the Searching for printers, please wait..
screen appears.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 45
Software description
Figure 2-5 Searching for printers, please wait.. screen
When a printer has been found, one of two screens appears: the Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found
screen or the Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen. The screens are shown in the following figures.
Figure 2-6 Step 2 of 3: Verify Printer Found screen
If the results do not list the printer, click Previous to search again.
If the printer that you want is listed, click Next. See Figure 2-8 Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings
screen.
46 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-7 Step 2 of 3: Select Printers screen
Select the printer in the Available Printers: pane and click the green double-arrows button. The model
name moves to the Printers to Add: pane.
Click Next to add the printer. The Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen appears.
Figure 2-8 Step 3 of 3: Customize Settings screen
Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings screen.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 47
Software description
Figure 2-9 Alert Settings screen
Turn alert notification on and off by selecting an option in the Settings for: field.
Under Printer Alerts, select the kind of alert notifications that you want to receive:
●Printer cannot print
●Printer has a problem, but can continue
If you want to be notified of problems only when printing to the product, select Only if I am printing to
this printer (user mode).
If you are an administrator or are responsible for ordering printer supplies, select Anytime problems
occur (maintainer mode).
Under Notification Method, select one of the following options:
●Popup dialog
●Desktop alert
Click Save to save your alert-notification settings. The My HP Printers screen appears.
48 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-10 MY HP Printers — HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
My HP Printers screen – Overview tab
Click the printer icon to open the Overview tab.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 49
Software description
Figure 2-11 Overview tab
The Overview tab shows the following information under Device Status:
●Printer name
●Printer TCP/IP address
●A graph showing usage for each color print cartridge
●A list of any problems that require attention
Click (the help button) to open the HP Easy Printer Care Help screen.
50 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-12 HP Easy Printer Care Help screen
The Overview Help screen provides an overview of the Device Status and Cartridges sections of the
Overview tab.
Under Supplies Status on the Overview tab, the following information is provided about print media:
●Location (by tray)
●Type (media type)
●Size (media size)
●Status (OK, Out)
Under Cartridges, the following information is provided for each color cartridge:
●Print Cartridge (color)
●Estimated Status (percentage)
●Pages Remaining
●HP Part Number
Click Supplies Ordering… to open the Supplies Ordering screen.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 51
Software description
Figure 2-13 Supplies Ordering screen
Select the appropriate check boxes under Order for each supply that you want. In the Quantity field,
type the quantity that you want to order.
Click Print Shopping List for a hard-copy list of the supplies that you are ordering.
Click Shop Online for Supplies if you have access to the Web and would like to place an online order.
The Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen appears.
Figure 2-14 Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen
52 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
If you click Yes, please send my printer information, only information and status about your printer
will be sent; no personal information will be shared. If you click No, let me provide my printer
information, no information is sent. The Welcome to HP SureSupply screen opens.
Figure 2-15 Welcome to HP SureSupply screen
On the Supplies Ordering page, click Cancel to return to the My HP Printers screen.
If the status of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer changes after you open the HP Easy Printer Care
screen (for instance, if you have sent a print job to the product), click (the refresh button) in the
upper-right corner of any screen where it appears.
HP Easy Printer Care – Support tab
On the My HP Printers screen, click the Support tab to open the Support screen.
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 53
Software description
Figure 2-16 Support tab
Click (the help button) to open the Support Help screen.
54 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-17 Support Help screen
The Support Help screen provides an overview of the Device Status, Maintenance Tools, and
Troubleshooting Tools sections of the Support tab.
On the Support tab, click Supplies Ordering to open the Supplies Ordering screen. The Transfer
printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen opens. See Figure 2-14 Transfer printer
information to HP InstantSupport? screen and the following instructions to proceed with your order.
Maintenance Tools
The following tools are available in the Maintenance Tools pane:
●Printer Usage Report
●Advanced Tools & Settings
●Software Update
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 55
Software description
Click Printer Usage Report to open a screen that provides information about print jobs that have been
sent to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The Printer Usage Report screen has three tabs:
●By Date/Time
●By User
●By Application
The following table shows the information that is available on each of the printer-usage report tabs.
Table 2-7 Printer Usage Report
Printer Usage Report tab Print-job information
By Date/Time Date/Time
Host
User
Job Name
Application
Color Sides
Mono Sides
Sheets Used
By User User
Total Jobs
Color Sides
Mono Sides
Sheets Used
By Application Application
Total Jobs
Color Sides
Mono Sides
Sheets Used
To export the printer-usage report into a file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel or other database
software program, follow these steps:
1. Click File.
2. Click Export.
3. Select the file format that you want to export the printer-usage report in, and then click OK.
Click the Advanced Tools & Settings option to open the HP Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see HP Embedded Web Server or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
56 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
NOTE HP Easy Printer Care software is a Windows application and does in itself not require
any browser support. The link to the HP Embedded Web Server, however uses a Web browser.
If you have access to the Internet, click Software Update to open the Web browser and find information
about the latest software for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The Welcome to HP Software
Update screen appears.
Figure 2-18 Welcome to HP Software Update screen
Click Next to check for software updates. The Checking for updates… screen appears.
Figure 2-19 Checking for updates… screen
ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 57
Software description
If software updates are available, a Web page opens with information about the updates. HP Software
Update finds updates for both print-drivers and HP Easy Printer Care.
You can also go directly to the following URL for software updates:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software
In the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab, click Browse online information to find
additional information about the product on the HP Web site.
In the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab, click Contact a support specialist to open a
Web page where you can supply information about the product and receive customized support. You
can send an instant message, an e-mail, or submit a problem and view the case status online. The page
also provides telephone numbers for HP customer care centers.
Troubleshooting Tools
The following tools are available in the Troubleshooting Tools pane of the Support tab:
●Run online diagnostics
●Browse online information
●Contact a support specialist
You can use the Run online diagnostics tool to communicate with an HP Web site that analyzes the
product and looks for problems. When you click the Run online diagnostics option, the Transfer
printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen appears. For more information, see Figure 2-14
Transfer printer information to HP InstantSupport? screen.
58 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a standard feature on the following
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer models when they are connected through a network:
●HP Color LaserJet 3800n
●HP Color LaserJet 3800dn
●HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn
The base model, the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, can use the HP EWS if an optional EIO Jetdirect
card is installed.
The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one product management. Instead of
installing management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin, use HP EWS for remote management in
offices that have a limited number of products. The only requirement is that the management console
must have a supported Web browser.
In environments that have a larger number of products, in which one-to-one management is impractical,
the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote product
management. Use HP Web Jetadmin for consolidated management tasks when you want to perform
operations on a selected set of products. For such environments, HP provides hooks between the
HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin so that you can configure HP EWS features on multiple products in
one operation. For example, you can set the security password for the HP EWS simultaneously on a
cluster of products.
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to: www.hp.com/
support/clj3800.
Access to the HP EWS
To open the HP EWS and view information about the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, open a supported
Web browser and type the product transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or
host name in the address field.
To find the product TCP/IP address, look for IP Address on the Embedded Jetdirect page, in the TCP/
IP section. To find the host name of the product, look for Host Name in the TCP/IP section.
You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the Networking
tab in the HP EWS window.
The TCP/IP address also appears on the product configuration page (the Embedded Jetdirect page),
which you can print from the product control-panel display. Follow these steps to print an Embedded
Jetdirect page:
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
.
3. Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4. Press to print the configuration page.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 59
Software description
The HP EWS frame
Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner, three category tabs, a left-aligned
navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the
corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes links to
content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and opens options in
response to navigation-tab selections and menu-bar selections.
See the following sections for more information about each tab or area:
●Information tab
●Settings tab
●Networking tab
Information tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab. To view the information, click
the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Information tab.
NOTE If an HP EWS password has been set, the Information tab is the only visible tab until
the user logs in. See Security for more information.
Not all of the screens on the tab are included in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
●Device Status. This screen provides current status information about the product.
●Configuration Page. This screen provides information about the product configuration.
●Supplies Status. This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages
that have been printed, and the serial number of the product.
●Event log. This screen provides information about reported printer errors.
●Usage page. This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through
the device, as well as the number of duplexed pages that have been printed.
●Diagnostics Page. The Diagnostics Page screen provides information about calibration, color
density, and parameters.
●Device Information. This screen shows device information, such as the product TCP/IP address
and serial number.
●Control Panel. This screen shows the product control panel.
●Color Usage Job Log. The Color Usage Job Log screen provides information about users, print
jobs, and software programs that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
●Print. Use this screen to print documents that are print-ready, such as those generated by a "print
to file" driver option, .PCL documents, .PS documents, .PDF files, and text (.TXT) files.
60 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Links to off-product solutions
Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks.
●hp instant support. This link connects to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve
specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for the product. Specific
status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the "Solve a
Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve
problems as quickly as possible.
●Order Supplies. This link connects to an HP product supplies screen from which you can order
genuine HP supplies for the product.
●Product Support. This link connects to an HP product-support screen from which you can search
for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for the
product.
Device Status screen
Status information, such as whether the product is online or the toner is low, is available through a Web
browser on a computer that is linked directly to the product. You can view this information without going
to the product to identify the status. The following figure shows how this information is presented on the
product Web page.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 61
Software description
Figure 2-20 HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen
Configuration Page
You can gain access to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 configuration page remotely through the HP EWS.
The HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information about the product in the
same way as the configuration page that is printed from the product. The following figures show an
example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS.
62 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-21 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 1 of 3
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 63
Software description
Figure 2-22 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 2 of 3
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
Figure 2-23 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 3 of 3
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
Settings tab
The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab. To view the information, click the
menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Settings tab. The Settings tab is shown in the Configure
device section.
64 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
●Configure Device. Use the Configure Device screen to print product information pages and
configure the product remotely.
●E-mail Server. Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing e-mail.
●Alerts. IT administrators can configure the product to send alerts in e-mail messages to anyone.
●AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send product configuration and supplies-usage
information periodically to your service provider.
●Security. Use the Security screen to manage security for the product.
●Edit Other Links. Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the Web
sites of your choice.
●Device Information. Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the
product, assign an asset number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about
the product, and the physical location of the product.
●Language. Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens
appear.
●Date & Time. Use this page to set the correct date and time for the product.
●Wake Time. Wake time can be set to turn on the product at a certain time on a daily basis. Only
one wake-time setting can be established per day; however, each day can have a different wake
time. The sleep-mode delay can also be set on this page.
●Restrict Color. Use the Restrict Color screen to restrict color printing for all users and software
programs or for specified users and software programs.
Configure device
You can obtain product configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS
screen and changing the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password
controls give management information systems (MIS) managers the level of control that they require
within their network environments. The following figure shows an example of product options that can
be configured remotely.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 65
Software description
Figure 2-24 HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen
Alerts
The product can automatically send e-mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified e-mail
addresses. For example, if toner is low, the product can notify the person who is responsible for ordering
or changing the print cartridge. If a product failure occurs, the product can send an e-mail alert directly
to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured to be sent
to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital assistants
(PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or uniform
resource locators (URLs) for expanded notification.
66 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-25 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 1 of 2
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 67
Software description
Figure 2-26 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 2 of 2
NOTE This figure is provided only as an example.
Security
The HP EWS screens that appear, and the settings on them, vary according to how you gain access to
the HP EWS: as a general user, an IT administrator, or a service provider. To control access to the
HP EWS screens, set a password on the Security page.
68 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-27 HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen
In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by
using the password. If no password is set (which is the default configuration), all of the tabs are visible.
If a password has been set, you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain access
to the protected HP EWS tabs (Settings and Networking).
Restrict Color
The Restrict Color screen is shown in the following figure.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 69
Software description
Use the Restrict Color screen to set color-printing access for the printer and to configure permissions
by user and software program. For more information about using this screen, see the HP Embedded
Web Server User Guide.
Control over color printing with the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is possible in a variety of ways. For
more information, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/coloraccess
Networking tab
The HP EWS Networking tab is shown in the following figure.
70 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
NOTE Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see
the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
Figure 2-28 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen
The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories:
●Configuration
●Security
●Diagnostics
For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide.
ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 71
Software description
Configuration section
●Network Settings
●Other Settings
●Privacy Settings
●Select Language
Security section
●Settings
●Authorization
●Mgmt. Protocols
Diagnostics section
●Network Statistics
●Protocol Info
●Configuration Page
Network settings
From the Networking tab, you can enable and configure the following network protocols:
●TCP/IP
●Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX)
●AppleTalk
●Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)
●Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
72 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
The HP Printer Utility is a software program that gives you access to the product in Mac OS X.
The HP Printer Utility is available only in Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later. The HP Printer Utility does not
work when it is installed by using the AppleTalk protocol. Use IP, Bonjour or Rendezvous to enable the
HP Printer Utility.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
●Access to the HP Printer Utility
●Supplies Status
●Device Information
●HP Support
●Upload Fonts
●File Upload
●Update Firmware
●Duplex mode
●Color Usage
●Trays Configuration
●Lock Resources
●Stored Jobs
●E-mail Alerts
●Network Settings
●Rendezvous Setting
●Supplies Management
●Restrict Color
●Additional Settings
Access to the HP Printer Utility
In Mac OS X V10.3, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility:
1. Open the Finder.
2. Find and double-click Printers. The Select Printer screen appears.
In Mac OS X V10.4, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility:
1. Click Go.
2. Click Utilities.
3. Double-click HP Printer Selector. The Select Printer screen appears.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 73
Software description
Figure 2-29 Select Printer screen – printer not selected
If the product does not appear, click More Printers…. The Connection Type screen appears.
Figure 2-30 Connection Type screen
Select the connection type (USB, TCP/IP, or AppleTalk). The product name appears under Device
Name.
74 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
On the Connection Type screen, click Add. The Select Printer screen appears, showing printer
information.
To open the HP Printer Utility directly, select the printer and click Launch Utility.
Figure 2-31 Select Printer screen – printer selected
On the Select Printer screen, click Settings… to open the Device Status screen in the HP EWS. For
more information about the HP EWS, see HP Embedded Web Server in this guide.
To open the HP Printer Utility, select the product and click Launch Utility.
If the HP Printer Utility software detects a condition that might need attention, the Printer Status screen
appears.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 75
Software description
Figure 2-32 Printer Status screen
Address the condition and click OK to close the screen. The HP Printer Utility opens.
The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP Printer Utility.
Supplies Status
The HP Printer Utility opens to the Supplies Status screen.
Figure 2-33 Supplies Status screen
Click Detailed Supplies Information… to open the Supplies Information screen.
76 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-34 Supplies Information screen
Use the scroll button to see information about the color print cartridges.
If you have Internet access and click Order HP Supplies, a screen appears that explains the ordering
process and describes the kind of information that can be sent about your product to facilitate the
ordering of supplies.
Figure 2-35 Order Supplies link
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 77
Software description
Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy
statement.
You can continue ordering supplies without sending product information by clicking the continue
without sending this information link.
To send a message to HP, click the contact HP link.
On the Supplies Status screen, click Media to see the status of the trays.
Figure 2-36 Paper Status screen
You can also order supplies from this screen by clicking Order HP Supplies.
Device Information
Click Device Information in the menu on the left to find the product service ID (if assigned), the firmware
version, and the serial number.
78 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-37 Device Information screen
The product configuration page shows other settings; click Print Configuration Page to print it.
Click the printer icon in the lower-left corner to see information about another installed printer. This action
relaunches the HP Printer Utility so that you can select another printer (see Figure 2-29 Select Printer
screen – printer not selected).
HP Support
Click HP Support to open the HP Online Support screen.
Figure 2-38 HP Online Support screen
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 79
Software description
If you have Internet access, you can connect to HP support pages over the Web from this screen.
Click the Instant Support screen to open the HP Instant Support Web page.
Figure 2-39 HP Instant Support link
Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy
statement.
Click the Product Support link if you do not want to send information to HP but would like to receive
generic product support.
Click Continue to open a page where you can select the product and find further information about
product support.
Click Cancel to return to the HP Online Support screen in the HP Printer Utility.
On the HP Online Support screen, click Order Supplies Online to open the Order Supplies Web page
(see Figure 2-35 Order Supplies link).
The Online Registration link is not available at this time.
Upload Fonts
In the Configuration Settings menu, click Upload Fonts to gain access to fonts that you can upload
to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
80 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-40 Upload Fonts screen
The drop-down menu in the Upload Fonts pane has the following options:
●Memory. Fonts that are available in the printer memory are listed.
●Disk. Select this option to shows any fonts that are installed on the product hard disk or flash disk.
By default, no fonts are stored on either of these disks. To upload fonts, select the font name and
click Add
File Upload
On the Configuration Settings menu, click File Upload to open the File Upload screen.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 81
Software description
Figure 2-41 File Upload screen
The File Upload command is supported for file types that can be sent directly to the printer without first
being opened through a software program. Some files can be uploaded to the product, but some cannot.
Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not
need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or
Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the product by using the File
Upload command.
●HP LaserJet printer command language (.PCL)
●Portable document format (.PDF)
●Postscript (.PS)
●Text (.TXT)
On the File Upload screen, click Choose… to open a navigation screen. Locate the file you want to
upload and click Open.
On the File Upload screen, click Display response from the device to see whether the upload was
successful. If the file loads successfully, no message appears.
On the navigation screen, select the file and click Open. The file name appears in the File Upload
screen of the HP Printer Utility. Click Upload.
Update Firmware
Select Update Firmware to locate a firmware upgrade file and install it on the product. Browse to the
firmware file on the screen that appears and click Open. The Update Firmware screen shows the file
name. Click Update. For more information about performing remote firmware upgrades, see Remote
firmware update in this STR.
For information about firmware updates in Mac OS 9 operating systems, see Remote firmware update
by using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9.x only).
82 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Duplex mode
For the HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer models, the Configuration
Settings menu includes a Duplex Mode setting. Click this setting to open the Duplex Mode screen.
Use the Enable Duplex Mode command to print internal diagnostic and test pages on both sides of the
page.
1. Select Duplex Mode to open the Duplex Mode screen.
2. Select the Enable Duplex Mode check box. This box is clear by default.
3. Click Apply Now to enable printing on both sides of the page.
Color Usage
Click Color Usage in the Configuration Settings menu to open a screen and print a color-usage job
log.
Figure 2-42 Print Color Usage Job Log screen
Click Print Color Usage Log to print a page that shows information about users, print jobs, and software
programs that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. In additions, the color-usage log lists
the following details about print jobs:
●Date and time
●Total number of jobs
●Mono (monochrome, or black-and-white) sides
●Color sides
●Media sheets
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 83
Software description
Trays Configuration
The Trays Configuration screen is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-43 Trays Configuration screen
1. Select Trays Configuration to change media size and type for each of the trays installed on your
product.
2. To change the media size, select a tray and then select a different media size in the Default Media
Size drop-down menu.
3. To change the media type, select a tray and then select a different media type in the Default Media
Type drop-down menu.
4. Click Apply Now to save the settings.
Lock Resources
Select Lock Resources to lock certain features of the HP Color LaserJet 3800
84 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-44 Lock Resources screen
In Control Panel Access Level, select one of the following settings:
●No Locking provides full control of the product.
●Minimal Locking provides control over paper-handling features.
●Moderate Locking blocks changes in the product configuration.
●Maximal Locking prevents users from changing product control-panel settings.
In the lower pane, select the Lock check box for the mass-storage unit that you want to lock.
WARNING! Click Initialize selected mass-storage unit only if you want to erase all data that
is currently stored on the hard drive. You cannot undo this action.
Stored Jobs
Select Stored Job to change the Enable Job Storing setting. This setting is selected by default. Click
to clear the check box to disable the job-storing feature.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 85
Software description
Figure 2-45 Enable Job Storing screen
You can type a PIN for your job in the Enter Secure Job PIN field.
Select the number of copies in the Copies to Print field.
Select a stored job and click Print to print the job.
Select a stored job and click Delete to delete the job.
For information about releasing and deleting stored jobs at the product control panel, see Releasing a
job-storage print job.
E-mail Alerts
Select E-mail Alerts to configure the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to send e-mail notifications to
users.
If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from the IT administrator.
For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
86 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-46 E-mail Alerts screen
Click Open E-mail Alerts Settings to open the HP EWS. The HP EWS opens to the Setup screen on
the Alerts tab, where you can set notifications. For information about configuring notifications, see
Alerts.
Network Settings
Select Network Settings to open the IP Settings screen.
Figure 2-47 IP Settings screen
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 87
Software description
Select one of the following options in the Configuration drop-down menu:
●DHCP
●BootP
●Manual
You can also use this screen to modify the following settings:
●Host Name
●IP Address
●Subnet Mask
●Default Gateway
To save new settings, click Apply Now.
To view and change other network settings, click Additional Network Settings.
If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from your IT administrator.
For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide.
The HP EWS opens to the Network Settings screen. For information about this screen, see Networking
tab in this STR.
Rendezvous Setting
Select Rendezvous Setting to open the Rendezvous Setting screen. Rendezvous is enabled by
default.
To disable Rendezvous, click to clear the Enable Rendezvous check box and then click Apply Now.
Figure 2-48 Rendezvous screen
88 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
The following options are available in the The highest priority service drop-down menu:
●Port 9100 (default)
●IPP
●LPD-RAW
●LPD-TEXT
●LPD-AUTO
●LPD-BINPS
●LPD-Queue5
●LPD-Queue6
●LPD-Queue7
●LPD-Queue8
●LPD-Queue9
●LPD-Queue10
After you select a new setting, click Apply Now to save it.
Supplies Management
Click Supplies Management in the Configuration Settings menu to open the Replace Supplies
screen.
Figure 2-49 Replace Supplies screen
The settings on this screen prompt the printer to stop printing at a certain threshold (a specific number
of pages in the tray). By default, the Stop At Supply Out setting is selected.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 89
Software description
To prompt the printer to stop printing at a different threshold, select Stop at Supply Low and type a
value in the Low Threshold (0-100) field. When the number of sheets in the tray reaches this value,
the printer stops printing.
You can also specify the printer behavior when the color print cartridges run out. By default, the
Continue Printing in Black-Only Mode is selected. To prompt the printer to stop instead of continuing
to print using the black cartridge, select Stop.
Click Apply Now to save the new settings.
Restrict Color
Click Restrict Color in the Configuration Settings menu to open the Restrict Color Use screen.
Figure 2-50 Restrict Color Use screen
On the Restrict Color Use tab, select one of the following options:
●Enable Color. Select this option to print all print jobs in color.
●Color If Allowed (selected by default). Select this option to allow the user and the software program
control over whether print jobs are printed in color.
●Disable Color. Select this option to print only in black.
Click Apply Now to save new settings.
To restrict color by user, click the User tab.
90 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Figure 2-51 Restrict Color Use – User tab
To set user permissions, select a user and then, in the Default User Permissions drop-down menu,
select one of the following options:
●Black Only
●Color
Click Apply Now to save new settings.
To add a new user, click Add.
Figure 2-52 Restrict Color – new user
Type the new user name in the User Name field.
On the Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options:
●Black Only
●Color
Click Add to add the new user.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without adding a new user.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 91
Software description
To restrict color usage by software program, click the Application tab on the Restrict Color Usage
screen.
Figure 2-53 Restrict Color Use – Application tab
To set software-program permissions, select a program and then, on the Default User Permissions
drop-down menu, select one of the following options:
●Black Only
●Color
Click Apply Now to save new settings.
To add a new software program, click Add.
Figure 2-54 Restrict Color – new user
Type the new software-program name in the Application Name field.
On the Permissions drop-down menu, select one of the following options:
●Black Only
●Color
Click Add to add the new software program.
92 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without adding a new software program.
Additional Settings
Select Additional Settings to gain access to the HP EWS.
Figure 2-55 Additional Settings screen
To open the HP EWS, click Open Embedded Web Server.
For information about HP EWS settings, see HP Embedded Web Server or consult the HP Embedded
Web Server User Guide.
ENWW HP Printer Utility for Macintosh 93
Software description
HP Web Jetadmin
Use the HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect-connected products within an intranet.
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single
network-administration server.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems,
go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
94 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW
3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the traditional print drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 in
Windows 98 and Windows Me.
NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers
in various operating systems, see Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems.
You can control print jobs from several places:
●the product control panel
●the software program print dialog box
●the driver user interface
Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the
media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take
precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override product control-panel
settings.
When you install the print drivers by using the printing-system installer in Windows 98 or Windows Me,
the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. You can install the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
by performing a Custom Installation.
NOTE Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers, but you can
use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely match the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet
4650 drivers, but some print-driver features might be missing and color quality might be
compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver that is supplied
for the product. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add
Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver.
This chapter describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Properties print-driver interface. It also shows the tabs that are
available on the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver interface for Windows 98
and Windows Me.
This chapter also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver.
The chapter contains the following sections:
ENWW Introduction 95
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
●Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me
●Help system
●Finishing tab features
●Effects tab features
●Paper tab features
●Job Storage tab features
●Basics tab features
●Color tab features
●Configure tab features
●HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
96 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access
to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:
1. Click File.
2. Click Print.
3. Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These
driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
Properties driver tabs
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the
print drivers, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings
for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me:
●General tab
●Details tab
●Color Management tab
●Sharing tab
●Finishing tab
●Effects tab
●Paper tab
●Job Storage tab
●Basics tab
●Color tab
●Configure tab
ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me 97
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Only product-specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR; the other driver tabs are part of the
operating system. The following tabs are described:
●Finishing
●Effects
●Paper
●Job Storage
●Configure
●Basics
●Color
●Configure
The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage Enable setting is selected on the
tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the Configure tab.
98 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Help system
The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver include a full-featured Help
system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
What's this? Help
Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help
messages in any of the following ways:
●Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
●Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.
●Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Incompatible Options messages
Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in
response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or
impossible given the product capabilities or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you
click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a message appears asking
you to resolve this conflict.
NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept
some settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. Sending a job with
incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check
the product documentation for the product capabilities.`
Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button
Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK and Cancel buttons, the interpretation of the
buttons is as follows:
●Click OK to accept the change that was just made. The driver then resets the conflicting control to
a setting that is compatible with the new value.
●Click Cancel to reject the change that was just made. The control returns to its previous value.
ENWW Help system 99
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Bubble Help
Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in
it, representing the international symbol for information. The following figure shows a Bubble Help icon
on a driver tab.
Figure 3-2 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon
The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an
available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the pointer
over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the
pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message
box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done
to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution that you should be aware
of when using that particular feature.
100 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Finishing tab features
To gain access to the Finishing tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Finishing tab.
Use the Finishing tab to print on both sides of the page, to control the printed output on the page, and
to print booklets. The following figure shows the Finishing tab.
Figure 3-3 The default Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
●Print Task Quick Sets
●Document Options
●Document preview image
●Print Quality
ENWW Finishing tab features 101
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they
are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the tab
affects the Print Task Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Properties driver tabs that have the Print
Task Quick Sets settings:
●Finishing
●Effects
●Paper
●Job Storage
●Basics
●Color
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator
settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on).
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Properties driver tabs and you want to save the
configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the
name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. The Print Task Quick Sets are
saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it in the drop-down menu and click
Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.
You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save
more, a message box appears that contains the following message: There are too many Print Task
Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones.
The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
●Default Print Settings
●User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that
existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that
are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been
changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver
Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
102 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable
1
Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group box Available, not
selected
Yes
Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
Booklet Printing Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, Off Yes
Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options group box 1Yes
Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes
Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes
Print Quality Finishing tab, Print Quality group box Default Yes
Current Setting Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
This is the “Default”
setting
Raster Compression
(HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver only)
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
Automatic
Rendering Mode
(HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver only)
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
Automatic
Send Truetype as
Bitmaps
Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
Available, not
selected
Yes
Output Settings Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box
(Click Details on Finishing tab.)
Scale Patterns
(WYSIWIG) selected
Print Document On Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Off; print on the size
that is specified on
the Paper tab
Yes
Size to print on Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Actual size specified
on the Paper tab
Yes
2
Scale to Fit Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Unavailable, selected Yes
Watermarks Effects tab, Watermarks dialog box (none) Yes
First Page Only
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark dialog box Unavailable Yes
Current Watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none) Yes
2
Watermark Message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none) Yes
2
Message Angle
(watermark)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Diagonal Yes
2
Watermark message
angle (angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Unavailable unless
Angle option is
selected, 52 degrees
Yes
ENWW Finishing tab features 103
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable
1
Name (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Arial Yes
2
Color (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Gray Yes
Shading (watermark
font )
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Very Light Yes
2
Size (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
80 No
Style (watermark
font)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box,
Font Attributes group box
Regular Yes
Use Different Paper/
Covers
Paper tab, Paper Options group box Off (All of the pages
use the same media.)
No
Size is: Paper tab, Paper Options group box Letter Yes
Source is: Paper tab, Paper Options group box Automatically Select Yes
Type is: Paper tab, Paper Options group box Unspecified Yes
Unlabeled group box Job Storage tab Status message
about the destination
of the job
No
Job Storage Mode Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Off No
Proof and Hold Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not
selected
No
Private Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not
selected
No
Quick Copy Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not
selected
No
Stored Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not
selected
No
Require PIN to print
option
Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, not
selected
No
PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, blank
Windows User Name Job Storage tab, User Name group box Unavailable, selected No
Job Name Job Storage tab, Job Name group box Unavailable,
Automatic selected
No
Display Job ID when
printing
Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options
group box
Unavailable No
Copy Basics tab, Copies group box 1Yes
Orientation Basics tab, Orientation group box Portrait Yes
Landscape Basics tab, Orientation group box Available, not
selected
Yes
Rotate by 180
degrees
Basics tab, Orientation group box Available, not
selected
Yes
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued)
104 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets for
Default values
Preconfigurable
1
Automatic (color
options)
Color tab, Color Options group box Selected Yes
Manual (color
options)
Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not
selected
Yes
Current Setting
(color)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab.)
This is the
“Automatic” Setting
Yes
Edge Control Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab.)
Normal Yes
Neutral Grays (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab.), General group box
Black Only Yes
Halftone (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Detail Yes
Neutral Grays
(graphics)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Black Only Yes
Halftone (graphics) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Detail Yes
Neutral Grays
(photographs)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
4-Color Yes
Halftone
(photographs)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Detail Yes
1
Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see HP Driver Preconfiguration, or go
to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw.
2
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings:
●Print on Both Sides is set to ON
●Flip Pages Up is set to ON
●Booklet Printing is set to OFF and is unavailable
●Pages per Sheet is set to 2
●Page Order is set to Right then Down
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
●Print on Both Sides
●Flip Pages Up
Table 3-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued)
ENWW Finishing tab features 105
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
●Booklet Printing
●Pages per Sheet
●Print Page Borders
●Page Order
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
●Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any of the following media types except for the following types:
●Labels
●Transparency
●Envelope
●Extra Heavy
●Cardstock
●Tough Paper
●Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes:
●Statement
●Envelope #10
●Envelope DL
●Envelope C5
●Envelope B5
●Envelope Monarch
●Double Japan Postscard Rotated
Selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available when
Paper Size is set to the following media sizes:
●Letter
●Legal
●A4
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both
Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with a duplexing
unit installed in the following models:
●HP Color LaserJet 3800dn
●HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn
106 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases
printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job
from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on
both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types:
●Prepunched
●Preprinted
●Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make
adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer
to use a group of settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to produce the best possible
quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is used with
each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Manually printing on both sides
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 and HP Color LaserJet 3800n printer models, which do not have a duplexing
unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock
and thick media.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver or the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. (The PS Emulation Driver does not support this
feature.) If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the product
automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4,
Legal, and 8.5 x 13, only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not
supported.
To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the
Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. See Paper
Handling Options in the Configure tab features section of this chapter.
If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing,
you must click to clear the Duplexing Unit check box on the Configure tab.
Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following
media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
●Plain
●Preprinted
●Letterhead
●Prepunched
●Bond
●Recycled
ENWW Finishing tab features 107
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
●Colored
●Rough
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode.
Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
1. Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2. Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.
3. When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which
the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.
Figure 3-4 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box
When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints
on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support
odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
Flip Pages Up
Use the Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, to
specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available. The following
table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation that is
selected on the Basics tab.
108 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Table 3-2 Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab) Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait Short-edge binding Long-edge binding
Landscape Long-edge binding Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding
along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the
lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on
the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet Printing
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported
media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The Booklet Printing drop-
down menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting is Off. The other
settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the
Paper tab:
●[paper size] (Left Binding)
●[paper size] (Right Binding)
When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding), the document preview
image changes to show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually
to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. For more information, see Pages per
Sheet.
Booklet printing is disabled when unsupported media sizes (such as envelopes) are selected as the
media size, and an incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver.
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:
●Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected.
●% of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.
●Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1.
●Size is: (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.
If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet
Printing to tell you why it is disabled.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports both book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages,
Last Page, or Back Cover settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the Use Different
ENWW Finishing tab features 109
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Paper/Covers check box) to select different printing options for the book. For more information, see
Paper tab features in this chapter.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet
that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the Finishing tab
to control booklet settings.
To print a booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1. In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2. Click the Finishing tab.
3. Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
4. In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The
booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Letter
[Left binding]).
5. Click OK in the print driver.
6. Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Figure 3-5 Printing a booklet
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet
of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are
110 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-
down menu provides six settings:
●1 page per sheet (default)
●2 pages per sheet
●4 pages per sheet
●6 pages per sheet
●9 pages per sheet
●16 pages per sheet
When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and
Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the
borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains the following selections:
●Right, then Down
●Down, then Right
●Left, then Down
●Down, then Left
The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples
in the following figure.
Figure 3-6 Page-order preview images
●2 pages per sheet
●4 pages per sheet
●6 pages per sheet
●9 pages per sheet
●16 pages per sheet
ENWW Finishing tab features 111
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
●Finishing
●Effects
●Paper
●Basics
●Color
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The
horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes.
Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Print Quality
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 print-driver Print Quality group box provides options that control output
settings and font settings.
The default setting for Print Quality is Default. To change the default print-quality settings, click
Details…. The Print Quality Details dialog box opens. The Print Quality Details dialog box has
different options depending on the driver that you are using.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The following options are available:
●Current Setting
112 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
●Graphic Settings
●Font Settings
●Output Settings
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. When you make
a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"
setting to This is a "Custom" setting.
Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings group box contains the Raster Compression drop-down menu.
Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method. The Raster
Compression drop-down menu provides the following settings:
●Automatic. The print driver determines the best compression method to use. This is the default
setting.
●Best Quality. This setting forces the print driver to use a lossless compression method. (Lossless
means that no data is lost during compression.)
●Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this setting requires the print driver to always use a
lossy compression method (some data is lost).
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides
an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes,
such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear)
by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which
retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings:
●Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when
certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What
you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works
only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
●The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the
driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as
black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver as shown in the following figure.
ENWW Finishing tab features 113
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Figure 3-8 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver
The following options are available:
●Current Setting
●Graphic Settings
●Font Settings
●Output Settings
Current Setting
The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. When you make
a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from This is the "Default"
setting to This is a "Custom" setting.
Graphic Settings
The Graphic Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver has settings for the graphics
rendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: options are available:
●Automatic. This is the default setting.
●Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the printer as a combination of
HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higher-
quality output.
●Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the printer as images
composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
●Send Page as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the
printer as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are experiencing
problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType as Bitmaps
option has no effect.
Font Settings
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides
an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes,
such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear)
114 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which
retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains controls for pattern scaling, and to print all text as black.
The following are default values for the Output Settings:
●Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when
certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What
you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works
only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default.
●The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the
driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as
black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
ENWW Finishing tab features 115
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Effects tab features
To gain access to the Effects tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Effects tab.
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure
shows the Effects tab.
Figure 3-9 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
●Print Task Quick Sets
●Fit To Page
●Document preview image
●Watermarks
116 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Finishing tab features.
Fit To Page
The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls:
●Print Document On
●Scale to Fit
●% of Normal Size
Print Document On
Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on
a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
●% of Normal Size is not 100.
●Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can
print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any
custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically
selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected
media size.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target
media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is
turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on
the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is
clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure
shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On
option selected and the target size specified as Letter.
Figure 3-10 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
ENWW Effects tab features 117
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in
relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting
in the entry box is 100% of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected
within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does
not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and
sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those
limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another
control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases from
the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator
is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the
arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the slider-
bar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type
the value into the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
●Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected.
●Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
●Finishing
●Effects
●Paper
●Basics
●Color
For more information about the document preview image, see Finishing tab features.
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or
edit an existing watermark.
The Watermarks group box contains the following controls:
●Current Watermarks
118 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
●First Page Only
●Edit…
Current Watermarks
The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
●(none)
●Confidential
●Draft
●SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the
system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting.
Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image.
First Page Only
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The
First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Edit…
Click Edit…, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following figure shows the
Watermark Details dialog box.
ENWW Effects tab features 119
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Figure 3-11 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark
and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.
The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls:
NOTE This section also contains information about default watermark settings.
●Current Watermarks
●Watermark Message
●Message Angle
●Document preview image
●Font Attributes
●Default watermark settings
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
120 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help
message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the
Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this occurs,
the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number
is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number
increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the
page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects
only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:
●Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the
lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
●Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-;eft and mid-right
edges of the page.
●Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric
spin box to select the angle.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box. The
document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark
Details dialog box.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
●Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The
default is language-dependent.
●Color
The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:
●Gray
●Red
ENWW Effects tab features 121
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
●Yellow
●Green
●Cyan
●Blue
●Magenta
●Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
●Lightest
●Very Light (default)
●Light
●Medium Light
●Medium
●Medium Dark
●Dark
●Very Dark
●Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly
saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select
Darkest to produce a black watermark.
●Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is language-
dependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.
●Style
The following settings are available:
●Regular
●Bold
●Italic
●Bold Italic
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default watermark settings
The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.
122 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Table 3-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks
Setting New watermark Preset watermark
Name Arial Varies by language
Color Gray Gray
Shading Very Light Very Light
Size 80 Varies by language
Style Regular Regular
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking
Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a
different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes
can be canceled.
ENWW Effects tab features 123
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Paper tab features
To gain access to the Paper tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Paper tab.
Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify
different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the
document. The following figure shows the Paper tab.
Figure 3-12 Paper tab
The Paper tab contains the following controls:
●Print Task Quick Sets
●Paper Options
●Document preview image
124 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
●Product image
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Finishing tab features.
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of the
document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections available by
default.
Figure 3-13 Paper Options group box (default)
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in
the following order:
●Size is
●Source is
●Type is
●Use Different Paper/Covers
●Custom
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
NOTE When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from
an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media
size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Letter-size
ENWW Paper tab features 125
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must also
use Letter-size media.
Because print-driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is
generally best to use the print driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size
setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different
media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media
sizes within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product,
a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray.
For information about media sizes, see Media attributes.
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the
Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information,
see Use Different Paper/Covers.
Custom
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab. The
following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected
and any setting other than First Page is also selected.
Figure 3-14 Custom Paper Size dialog box
When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains
one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab:
●If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains
the name of that custom size.
●If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default
name Untitled (plus a number sign [#] and a numerical value) for a custom media size.
126 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
NOTE In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for
example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4 inches
x 11 inches).
The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not
against the standard media-size names.
The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and
capabilities are discussed in the Save, Delete, or Rename section.
Name
The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently.
Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes, or to
type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the following
conditions:
●If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls
in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name
of the last selected custom media size.
●If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or
if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default
name of "Untitled."
●If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new
size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a
saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu.
If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click Save, you can change
the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved media-size name is selected
from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and replaced by
the values of the selected custom media size.
ENWW Paper tab features 127
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Save, Delete, or Rename
The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels:
Save, Delete, and Rename.
●Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most
recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button
causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names.
If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you
click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver returns to the
Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared
only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the standard media-size
names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button.
●Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size
appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the drop-
down menu or clicking Save. Clicking Delete causes the saved custom media size to be deleted,
after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled, the height and width controls are
unchanged, and the button title changes to Save.
●Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting
an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name
of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name drop-down menu.
The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command
button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.
Table 3-4 Name drop-down menu text strings
State Drop-down menu
contents
Button label Action Next state
1Untitled Save Click Save. 3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 2
Change the width or height values. 1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3
2<user-typed text> Save Click Save. 3
Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 2
Change the width or height values. 2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3
3<name of saved item> Delete Click Delete. 1
Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 4
Change the width or height values. 1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3
4 <user-typed text> Rename Click Rename (when the name is unique). 3
Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate). 4
Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 4
128 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
State Drop-down menu
contents
Button label Action Next state
Change the width or height values. 2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3
Custom size (width and height controls)
The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by
using the up and down arrows. The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the
maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height
control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See Custom width and height control limits.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest
whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole
millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated
when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement
units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment
amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values
change.
Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the
measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic
measurement units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the
maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for
each media-handling device.
Table 3-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 (100-sheet
multipurpose)
Width 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) 215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 3 (500-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Duplexing unit Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Table 3-4 Name drop-down menu text strings (continued)
ENWW Paper tab features 129
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Dynamic measurement units
Use the dynamic measurement units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard
(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic, depending
on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in
inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in
millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch measurement-unit types.
Close
When you click the Close button, the Custom Paper Size dialog box closes according to the logic in
the following table. In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed
or deleted) while the dialog box is open remains in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The
following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.
Table 3-6 Close dialog-box text strings
If the drop-down menu contains And the button says Then this happens when you click the
Close button
Untitled Save The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when you clicked the
Custom button.
<user-typed text> Save The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when you clicked the
Custom button.
<name of saved item> Delete The dialog box closes, and the current
media size is set to the size that last
appeared in the drop-down menu.
<user-typed text> Rename The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current media size remains the
same as it was when you clicked the
Custom button.
Source is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed
through the Configure tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been
installed on the product:
●Automatically select
●Manual Feed in Tray 1
●Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
130 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
●Tray 2 (250-sheet tray)
●Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 3800
uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray
other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.
For more information about media sources, see the Media attributes section of this STR.
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports.
When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually
Plain.
The following standard types appear in the list:
●Unspecified
●Plain
●Preprinted
●Letterhead
●Transparency
●Prepunched
●Labels
●Bond
●Recycled
●Color
●Cardstock 164-220 g/m2 (45–60.3 lb)
●Rough
●Heavy 105-120 g/m2 (28.8–32.9 lb)
●Envelope
●Light 60-75 g/m2 (16.4–20.5 lb)
●Intermediate 90-104 g/m2 (24.7–28.5 lb)
●Extra Heavy 120-163 g/m2 (32.9–44.7 lb)
●Glossy 106-120 g/m2 (29.1–32.9 lb)
●Tough Paper (Glossy Film)
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different
setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is:
setting.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a
control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray.
ENWW Paper tab features 131
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this STR.
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the
group box, along with associated options:
●Front Cover
●First Page
●Other Pages
●Last Page
●Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the size that you selected in the First Page settings and the Size is: driver
setting becomes unavailable for all of the other Use Different Paper/Covers options. Therefore,
the First Page settings are described first in the following sections.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain
configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include
a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the
document.
The Front Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-15 Front Cover options
132 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
The following are the Front Cover options:
●Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus
become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are
installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting,
see the Source is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is:drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter.
First Page
Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a
document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select
the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default.
Figure 3-16 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
●Size is: drop-down menu
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting
becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
ENWW Paper tab features 133
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First
Page) for the other pages of the document.
The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-17 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a document.
The Last Page setting and options are shown in the following figure.
134 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 3-18 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the Source
is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document.
The Back Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-19 Back Cover setting
ENWW Paper tab features 135
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
The following are the Back Cover options:
●Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus
become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting
is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would
otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are
installed through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting,
see the Source is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is section of this chapter.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
●Finishing
●Effects
●Paper
●Basics
●Color
For more information about the document preview image, see Finishing tab features.
Product image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration
of the product and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the image that
appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties.
On the Paper tab, the product image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When
you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The current
136 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a product-image hot spot, is
highlighted on the printer image. The following points are worth noting:
●The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a
corresponding area to highlight in the product image. Selecting other settings in this menu
highlights the corresponding part in the printer image.
●Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in the
Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1, which is available from the Source is: drop-down menu,
cannot be selected by selecting the image.
●On the Paper tab, only source trays have product-image hot spots and can be highlighted.
ENWW Paper tab features 137
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Job Storage tab features
To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Job Storage tab.
NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 128 MB of
total memory is installed and configured.
Use the job-storage features to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer memory for printing
at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled. To
support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript
(.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory,
install a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage
features. A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB is required to use the job-storage features.
After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes
in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature
can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the Configure tab features section in this
chapter.
To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Configure tab.
7. Under Other Options, click More….
8. If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down menu.
If you select at least 128 MB of total installed memory, this also selects the Job Storage Enabled
check box.
9. If a hard disk has been installed, select the Printer Hard Disk check box in the Storage group
box. This also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box.
10. Click OK to make the hard-disk and job-storage features available.
138 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the hard disk enabled. To disable the job-storage
feature, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Configure tab.
7. Click More….
8. Click to clear the Job Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box.
NOTE When the job-storage features are disabled (that is, when the Job Storage
Enabled check box is not selected and the settings are saved), the Job Storage tab is not
visible.
If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total
memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
●Proof and Hold
●Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is
installed:
●Quick Copy
●Stored Job
The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.
ENWW Job Storage tab features 139
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Figure 3-20 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
NOTE This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing.
●Print Task Quick Sets
●Status dialog box
●Job Storage Mode
●PIN
●Job Notification Options
●User Name
●Job Name
●Using job-storage features when printing
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Finishing tab features.
140 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Status dialog box
The unlabeled dialog box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to store documents at the
product and then control their printing at the product control panel.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
●Off
●Proof and Hold
●Private Job
●Quick Copy
●Stored Job
These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections.
Off
When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print
job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the product must have
a minimum total memory of 128 MB.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing
you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the
print job at the product control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be
stored in the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more
copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-
hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and
you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold
jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-and-
hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and
the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already
stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the product must have a
minimum total memory of 128 MB.
ENWW Job Storage tab features 141
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the
job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can
be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is
immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or
confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are
needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the
product.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you
type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to type
more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when
the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default
initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature
must be enabled.
When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the
product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The
number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control
panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-and-
hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and
the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature
must be enabled.
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the product hard disk without printing it. The
print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the
product hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or is overwritten by a document that has the
same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the product hard disk when the product is turned
off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job.
Select the Require PIN to Print check box to set the private mode. Use a private stored job to send a
print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN up to 4 digits long
at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.)
After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control
panel.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you
select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored
job private.
142 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted
from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product after
printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
PIN
The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print, is activated if
you select either of the following options:
●Select Private Job. If selected, you must type the PIN number at the product control panel in order
to print the job. For more information, see Private Job.
●Select Stored Job, and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to
Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. For more
information, see Stored Job.
Job Notification Options
Clicking a job-storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become
available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well
as the product name, port, and location.
User Name
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are
the User Name settings:
●Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.
The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options.
●Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom option, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain
no more than 16 characters.
Job Name
Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The following
are the Job Name settings:
●<Automatic> This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that
is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the
print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The
file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program
name or a time stamp is used for the job name.
●Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which
<Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string
of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating
system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel
display.
ENWW Job Storage tab features 143
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase
or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the product control-panel display. If you
try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is
removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16
characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>. The
acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be
of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.
If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the product software
can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will
overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job
because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name,
or when one is created automatically, the product software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the
end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want
the product software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name.
Using job-storage features when printing
To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1. Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
job-storage features.
2. Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Job Storage tab.
4. Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any
required fields.
5. Click OK.
Releasing a job-storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the
product control panel.
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product
control panel, and then press .
3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .
4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .
5. Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
6. Press .
7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then
press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this
step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
144 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 8.
8. Press and to select the number of copies to print.
9. Press to print the job.
Deleting a job-storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the
product control panel.
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product
control panel, and then press .
3. Press .
4. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .
5. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .
6. Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
7. Press .
8. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then
press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this
step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
9. Press to delete the job.
The stored print job is deleted and the product returns to the READY state.
ENWW Job Storage tab features 145
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Basics tab features
To gain access to the Basics tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Basics tab.
The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation
of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.
Figure 3-21 Basics tab
The Basics tab contains the following controls:
●Print Task Quick Sets
●Copies
●Orientation
●Document preview image
146 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
●About…
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Finishing tab features.
Copies
Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number
by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are
numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when
the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used.
When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as
non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed
to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program that you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not
take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in
the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It
is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds
into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are
portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page
orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
The Orientation group box contains three options:
●Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
●Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
●Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is
rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If
you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.
ENWW Basics tab features 147
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
●Finishing
●Effects
●Paper
●Basics
●Color
For more information about the document preview image, see Finishing tab features.
About…
When you click About on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver Properties tabs,
the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close it, perform any of the following actions:
●Click OK.
●Press Esc.
●Press Alt + F4.
●Press Enter.
The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box. The information that it contains varies
according to driver, date, and version.
Figure 3-22 About This Driver dialog box
148 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information:
●Printer name
●Driver name
●Print driver version number
●Copyright information
●Driver Extensions (if any)
●Configuration Status
The printer name, the driver name, the print driver version number, and the copyright information appear
at the top of the About This Driver dialog box.
The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any.
The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether
administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the
configuration is default or user-defined.
ENWW Basics tab features 149
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Color tab features
To gain access to the Color tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Color tab.
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and
halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following
figure.
Figure 3-23 Color tab
The Color tab contains the following controls:
●Print Task Quick Sets
●Color Options
●Color Themes
150 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
●Document preview image
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or
user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see
Finishing tab features.
Color Options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print
job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:
●Automatic option (default)
●Manual option
●Settings button (Click this to open the Color Settings dialog box.)
●Print in Grayscale check box
Automatic
Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The
Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color-printing needs.
Manual
To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click Settings. The Color
Settings dialog box appears.
To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings
dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Automatic"
settings.
ENWW Color tab features 151
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Figure 3-24 Color Settings dialog box
The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls for each of the following components:
●General
●Edge Control
●Text
●Neutral Grays
●Halftone
●Graphics
●Neutral Grays
●Halftone
●Photographs
●Neutral Grays
●Halftone
General
Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing.
152 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components:
●Adaptive Halftoning, which increases edge sharpness
●Trapping, which reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges
of adjacent objects
●Color Resolution Enhancement Technology (C-REt), which increases the apparent resolution by
placing each dot for the smoothest edges
The Edge Control option offers four settings:
●Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to
On, and C-REt is set to On.
●Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is
set to On.
●Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On,
and C-REt is set to On.
●Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is
embedded in the product firmware. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text,
graphics, or photographs. The following options are available:
●Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This
option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for
the Text and Graphics components.
●4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces
smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible
black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs.
Halftone
The Halftone setting controls the selection of a printer-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded
in the product firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the product mixes the four primary colors (cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options
affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for
text, graphics, and photographs independently. The following Halftone settings are available:
●Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions
among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option
for sharp edges and detail.
●Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances
photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option for uniform and smooth area
fills.
Print in Grayscale
Select Print in Grayscale to print a document in black and white. This option is useful for previewing
preliminary copies of slides and hard-copy output quickly or for printing color documents that will be
photocopied or faxed.
ENWW Color tab features 153
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Color Themes
This group box contains controls for color settings:
●RGB Color
●CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
RGB Color
The RGB Color drop-down menu contains the following settings:
●Default (sRGB)
●Image Optimization (sRGB)
●Adobe RGB (1998)
●None
●Custom Profile
Default (sRGB)
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB color
as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).
Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.
Image Optimization (sRGB)
Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap
images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the product to use the best color matching for
rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vector-
based graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum
enhancement.
Adobe RGB (1998)
Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For
example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RGB, and documents that are produced with
Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software
program that uses Adobe RGB, turn off the color management in the software program and allow the
product software to manage the color space.
None
Select None to instruct the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly
when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program or the operating
system.
NOTE To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures
for managing color in the software program or the operating system.
154 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Custom Profile
Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using
special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict
and control color output.
The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The product
holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases
the default color table and installs the new one.
You can download custom profiles from the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware
CMYK Color (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
The CMYK Color drop-down menu contains the following settings:
Default CMYK+
Select Default CMYK+ to enable a high-quality default CMYK print path. This option can be selected
for most digital commercial print jobs and should produce optimal prints.
SWOP
SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publications) is a common ink standard in the United States of
America and other countries/regions.
Euroscale
Euroscale, also known as Euro Standard, is a common ink standard in Europe and other countries/
regions.
DIC
DIC (Dainippon Ink and Chemical) is a common ink standard in Japan and other countries/regions.
Custom Profile
Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other printers or for using
special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict
and control color output.
The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The product
holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases
the default color table and installs the new one.
You can download custom profiles from the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware
ENWW Color tab features 155
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs:
●Finishing
●Effects
●Paper
●Basics
●Color
For more information about the document preview image, see Finishing tab features.
156 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Configure tab features
To gain access to the Configure tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Configure tab.
Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the product hardware configuration. If bidirectional
communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by clicking Update Now. If your
environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now button is unavailable, so
you must manually configure the options on this tab.
The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking
Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a
few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0). When opened from the Printers
folder, the Configure tab looks like the following figure.
Figure 3-25 Configure tab
The Configure tab contains the following controls:
ENWW Configure tab features 157
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
●Printer Model
●Paper Handling Options
●Other Options
●Automatic configuration
●Printer image
Printer Model
In the Printer Model group box, the driver title depends on the printer model that is being used. Selection
of any model in the drop-down menu makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on
the tab.
The Printer Model setting automatically changes to User Configured whenever you change any of the
device configuration settings on the tab.
The list of models and the changes they produce are described in the following table. The models are
as follows:
●3800: HP Color LaserJet 3800
●3800n: HP Color LaserJet 3800n
●3800dn: HP Color LaserJet 3800dn
●3800dtn: HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn
Table 3-7 Printer-model configuration settings
Driver location Setting 3800 3800n 3800dn 3800dtn
Configuration tab Duplexing Unit Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Selected Selected
Allow Manual Duplexing Selected Selected Selected Selected
Mopier Enabled Unavailable Unavailable Selected Selected
Optional Paper Sources (None) (None) (None) 1 x HP 500-
Sheet Input
Tray
More Configuration
Options dialog box
Printer Hard Disk Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Job Storage Enabled Unavailable Available, not
selected
Selected Selected
Font Card(s) Selected Selected Selected Selected
Allow Scaling from Large
Paper
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Alternative Letterhead
Mode
Unavailable Unavailable Available, not
selected
Available, not
selected
Ignore Application
Collation
Unavailable Selected Selected Selected
Total Memory 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 256 MB
158 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Driver location Setting 3800 3800n 3800dn 3800dtn
Driver work space (DWS) 6.0 MB 38.0 MB 102.0 MB 102.0 MB
Include Types in
Applications Source List
Selected Selected Selected Selected
If it is installed and working, the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the
configuration accordingly, either during installation or when you select Update Now on the Configure
tab. However, the printer-model name that appears in the Printer Model text box is set to
Autoconfigured.
Paper Handling Options
The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls:
●Duplexing unit
●Allow Manual Duplexing
●Mopier Enabled
●Optional Paper Sources
Duplexing unit
The HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer models are equipped with
automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which you can use to print on both sides of supported media.
Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for the following media types:
●Transparency
●Labels
●Extra Heavy
●Cardstock
●Tough Paper
●Envelope
NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing
feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the
duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except
transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the
input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.
Table 3-7 Printer-model configuration settings (continued)
ENWW Configure tab features 159
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Mopier Enabled
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces
network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then temporarily storing it in memory.
The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier
mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra
step of using a photocopier.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the product has
an installed hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the
Configure tab is on.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs
mopying, which is the ability to send multiple original print jobs to the product. Collating is controlled by
using either the print driver or the document software program. Click to clear the Mopier Enabled
selection on the Configure tab to disable the feature.
Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application Collation check
box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click More… on the
Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Mopier Enabled setting
on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, you must clear the Ignore
Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not
selected.
The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the
software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected
result," shows how a three-page print job would appear.
Table 3-8 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier Enabled Application collation Ignore Application
Collation
Expected result
Not selected Not selected Not available 3 copies uncollated
Not selected Selected Not available 3 copies collated
Selected Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated
Selected Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated
Selected Selected Not selected 3 copies collated by printer
Selected Selected Selected 3 copies collated by printer
Optional Paper Sources
The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The list of available source trays varies depending on the printer, its
input accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab.
160 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
For the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper
Sources drop-down menu:
●(None). This is the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
●HP 500-Sheet Input Tray
Other Options
The Other Options group box contains a single More… command button. Click More… to open the
More Configuration Options dialog box.
Figure 3-26 More Configuration Options dialog box
The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls:
●Storage
●Fonts
●Allow Scaling from Large Paper
●Alternative Letterhead Mode
●Ignore Application Collation
●Printer Memory
●Include Types in Application Source List
Storage
The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes. If the
product is equipped with a hard-disk drive, the Printer Hard Disk check box should be selected and all
job-storage options are available. If your HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is not equipped with a hard-disk
drive but has a minimum of 128 MB of memory, limited job-storage options are available. When the job-
ENWW Configure tab features 161
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
storage feature is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print
jobs later at the product control panel.
Fonts
The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button.
Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored data
about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is
enabled. Click Configure to open the Configure Font Cards dialog box. If the Font Card(s) check box
was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box, selecting that check
box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box.
Figure 3-27 Configure Font Cards dialog box
Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks:
●Add up to four font cards by clicking the Add button.
●Specify a unique font-card name.
●Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards.
●Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right (Fonts)
shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s).
●Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).
Complete the following steps to configure a font card:
1. Make sure that the font card is installed correctly.
2. Click Add. The Add Font Card dialog box appears.
3. Click Browse. The Font Card Files dialog box appears.
4. Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card.
5. Click OK.
162 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
6. Specify a font-card name in the Add Font Card dialog box, if necessary.
7. Click OK. The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file to
see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list.
8. Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available
on the system.
NOTE When using font cards with the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional
PCL 5 Driver: To install screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically
designed to work with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is
specifically designed to work with that card.
Allow Scaling from Large Paper
Select Allow Scaling from Large Paper to allow additional larger-than-supported paper sizes to appear
in the Paper tab Size Is: drop-down list. By default, the Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box is
not selected.
The Allow Scaling from Large Paper selection can be helpful, for example, when printing a document
with a large media size of 11 x 17 or A3. You can use the Print Document On: setting on the Effects
tab to print the document on a media size that product supports.
Alternative Letterhead Mode
When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray,
whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on
both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or face-
down, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown.
When this option is selected, you must select one of the following options in the Type is setting:
●Letterhead
●Preprinted
Ignore Application Collation
This setting overrides collation options that are selected in the print options of a software program. When
Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way for the
print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using.
Printer Memory
The Total Memory value shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the printer.
The Total memory value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the
printer. The default values for total printer memory are specified on the Configuration tab.
The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track
of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the
available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific
configuration of the printer. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is
available to the printer. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance.
The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers automatically configure the Total Memory and (DWS)
values in Windows 98 and Windows Me environments that support bidirectional communication. To
ENWW Configure tab features 163
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
manually set the Total Memory and (DWS) values, print a configuration page and find the Total Memory
and DWS values in the Memory section of the page. Then, click More… on the Configuration tab, and
either use the up and down arrows to select the appropriate values or type the Total Memory and DWS
values in the Total Memory and (DWS) fields of the More Configuration Options dialog box.
Include Types in Application Source List
When the Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected, all media types (such as
heavy media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you
are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu and then
clicking Properties.
Automatic configuration
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer since installation, click
Update Now to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For more information about the
print driver automatic configuration feature, see the Driver Configuration for Windows section of this
STR.
If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the
Configure tab.
If you have more than one driver installed on your product (for example, the default HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver), the Update Now feature works automatically only
on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default
setting for your product model.
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical
configuration of the product according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same
appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab.
NOTE The product image shown on the Configure tab might differ from the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, depending on the accessories that are installed.
164 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features
When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the HP Traditional Postscript
3 Emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.
NOTE Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print drivers, but you can
use print drivers for legacy HP products whose feature sets closely match the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP Color LaserJet
4650 drivers, but some print-driver features might be missing and color quality might be
compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver that is supplied
for the product. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add
Printer installation method to install the PS Emulation Driver.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver
Properties interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for
Windows 98 and Windows Me.
Access to print-driver settings in Windows 98 and Windows Me
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the
print drivers, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs.
The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings
for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me:
●General
●Details
●Color Management
●Sharing
●Paper
●Graphics
●Fonts
●Device Options
●PostScript
PS 3 emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 3800
A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently
install soft fonts in the printer, postscript fonts are available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 165
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript fonts are purchased from
Adobe.
Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print drivers
from Adobe with the HP LaserJet PostScript 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe
PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe
Web site at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html
See the Font support section of this STR for a list of the additional fonts.
Help system
The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and
configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the PS Emulation
Driver.
What's this Help
Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help
messages in any of the following ways:
●Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
●Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.
●Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Paper tab features
To gain access to the Paper tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Paper tab.
The Paper tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure
shows the Paper tab.
166 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 3-28 Paper tab
The Paper tab contains the following controls:
●Paper size
●Layout
●Orientation
●Paper source
●Copies
●Unprintable Area…
●More Options…
●About …
●Restore Defaults
Paper size
The Paper size selection area lists the paper or envelope sizes that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
supports. Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of supported media sizes (forms), and then click
the icon to specify the media that you want.
A red circle with a line through any of the paper icons means that paper size is available, but you must
change a driver setting before you can print on that media size. The setting might be on the Paper tab,
such as the Paper source setting, or it might be a setting on the product control panel.
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 167
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Clicking Custom page 1, Custom page 2, or Custom page 3 makes the Custom button available at
the bottom of the Paper tab. Clicking Custom opens the Custom-defined size dialog box that you can
use to define a custom paper size.
The following figure shows the Custom-defined size dialog box.
Figure 3-29 Custom-designed size dialog box
The following controls appear on the Custom-defined size dialog box:
●Paper name text box. Use this option to type a name for this custom media size. You can define
up to three custom sizes at one time.
●Width spin box. Use this control to specify the width for this custom media size.
●Length spin box. Use this control to specify the length for this custom media size.
●Units group box. Click Inches or Millimeters to specify the measurement unit for this custom
media size.
●Transverse check box. Clicking this check box rotates the document 90° when printing on a roll-
fed device. Depending on the size of the printed page, you might save media` if you rotate the page
when printing.
●Restore defaults button. Click this button to restore the settings in the Custom-defined size dialog
box to their original values.
Layout
Use the settings in this group box to specify how many pages of the document print on a single sheet.
For example, clicking 1 up prints one page of the document on each sheet. Clicking 2 up prints two
pages on each sheet of paper, dividing the sheet in half. The Layout group box values are ignored if
you print an EPS file.
The following options are available in the Layout group box:
●1 up
●2 up
●4 up
168 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Orientation
The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on the page. The following options
are available:
●Portrait option button. Use this button to print your document in portrait mode. When you click this
button, the page icon shows an example of the portrait orientation.
●Landscape option button. Use this button to print your document in landscape mode. When you
click this button, the page icon shows an example of the landscape orientation.
●Rotate check box. The Rotate check box becomes available when you click the Landscape option.
Select the Rotate check box to rotate the image on the page.
To see the current dimensions of the page, such as the paper size and the unprintable margins, point
to the page icon, and then press and hold down the mouse button. The Orientation group box is
replaced by the Page dimensions in inches group box as seen in the following figure. Releasing the
mouse button restores the Orientation group box.
Figure 3-30 Page dimensions in inches
Paper source
This setting specifies where the media that you want to use is located in the printer. The default setting
is Auto Select Tray, which causes the printer to use the tray that supports the paper size that you have
chosen.
The following options are available:
●Auto Select Tray
●Printer Auto Select
●Manual Feed in Tray 1
●Tray 1 through Tray 3, if installed on the product. If any of these trays are not installed, a red circle
with a slash through it appears next to the tray name.
●Each of the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports, such as Plain,
Preprinted, and Letterhead. For a full list of supported paper types see Driver-supported media
types.
Copies
Use this box to specify the number of copies to print. You can print from 1 to 999 copies. This option is
ignored when printing an .EPS file. Some software programs override this setting.
Unprintable Area…
Click Unprintable Area … to open the Unprintable Area dialog box, which is shown in the following
figure.
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 169
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Figure 3-31 Unprintable Area dialog box
The area of the page that cannot be printed appears in the Unprintable Area dialog box. Changing
these settings to exceed the built-in page margins can cause the text in your document to be cut off
when printed.
More Options…
Click More Options … to open the More Paper Options dialog box, shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-32 More Paper Options dialog box
The single control on this dialog box is the Printing on both sides (duplex printing) group box.
Use the settings in this group box to specify how you want to turn the page if you print on both sides.
When you print on two sides of the page, the document can be read differently depending on the way
it is printed. For example, you could have the pages of the document turn like a book or like a calendar.
When you click Flip On Long Edge or Flip On Short Edge, the page icon changes to illustrate how
the printed document will look.
About …
Click About… to open a dialog box that contains copyright and version information about the print driver.
The following figure shows the About dialog box.
170 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 3-33 About dialog box
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Paper tab to their original values.
Graphics tab features
To gain access to the Graphics tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Graphics tab.
The Graphics tab specifies the resolution, color controls, and halftoning settings for the product. The
following figure shows the Graphics tab.
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 171
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Figure 3-34 Graphics tab
The Graphics tab contains the following controls:
●Resolution
●Color Control
●Halftoning
●Special
●Scaling
●Restore Defaults
Resolution
Use the Resolution drop-down menu to specify the resolution for printing. Resolution is measured in
dots per inch (dpi). The dpi setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is 600 dpi.
Color Control
The Color Control option specifies whether you want the colors in your document to be adjusted before
printing so that the printed page more closely matches the colors that you see on your screen. No Image
Color Management (faster) is selected by default, and results in a faster print job.
If you click Use Image Color Management on the host (slower), the Choose Rendering Intent button
becomes available. Click this button to open the Image Color Management dialog box to specify exactly
how you want the colors adjusted.
The following figure shows the Image Color Management dialog box.
172 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 3-35 Image Color Management dialog box
Use the Image Color Management dialog box to specify how color images are created to produce the
best-looking image on the printed page.
The following controls are available:
●Saturation. Use this option when printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors.
●Contrast. Use this option for photographs or pictures in which the colors blend together.
●Colorimetric. Use this option for documents that contain a color for which you need an exact
match, and you are sending the document to a product that has that specific color of ink.
Halftoning
The Halftoning options specify values for the number of lines per inch (frequency) and angle of the
pattern that you want to use for halftone screens.
If print jobs have a moiré pattern when you print graphics such as photographs or detailed images, you
might want to adjust these settings. However, the default printer settings should work in most cases. Do
not change these settings unless you have experience using halftones. To return to the default settings
after you have made changes, click Use printer's settings.
Special
The Special group box contains the following options:
●Print as a negative image. Selecting this option prints a negative of the image by complementing
the RGB values or reversing the black and white values. Click this option to see the page icon
change to reflect this setting.
●Print as a mirror image. Selecting this option prints a mirror image of your document by reversing
the horizontal coordinates. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting.
Scaling
Use the Scaling control to specify the size of the image to print. You can specify from 25% to 400% of
the original size. A setting of 400%, for example, prints an image four times larger than the original.
When you enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page prints. The default
setting is 100%.
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Graphics tab to their original values.
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 173
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Fonts tab features
The Fonts tab controls the fonts for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the
Fonts tab.
Figure 3-36 Fonts tab
The following options are available:
●Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table
●Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts
●Always use TrueType fonts
Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table
Use this option to substitute a postscript printer font for the common TrueType fonts in a document. This
can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. By default, common
TrueType fonts are substituted when printing, but uncommon ones are downloaded to the product. If
you substitute a printer font for a TrueType font, the printed document might not match the look of the
document on the screen.
Click Edit the Table… to customize which TrueType fonts are downloaded and which printer fonts
should be substituted for TrueType fonts.
Font Substitution Table
Click this option to open the Font Substitution Table dialog box, which makes available the options
for changing the TrueType-to-postscript font mapping. The following figure shows the Font Substitution
Table dialog box.
174 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 3-37 Font Substitution Table
Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts
Click this option to use font-matching rules to find the best printer font to substitute for TrueType fonts
in your document. TrueType fonts are not downloaded when the document is printed. This can speed
up printing, but the printed fonts might not exactly match the fonts on the screen.
Always use TrueType fonts
Click this option to download TrueType fonts to the product when your document is printed. This ensures
that the printed document looks the same as it does on the screen, but printing might take longer. Click
Send Fonts As… to specify the format in which the TrueType fonts are sent to the product.
Send Fonts As…
Use this option to specify how TrueType fonts are downloaded.
Figure 3-38 Send Fonts As… dialog box
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 175
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
The following options are available:
●Sent TrueType fonts as:. This control offers the following settings:
●Outlines. Use this setting for scalable outlines.
●Bitmaps. Use this setting for bitmaps.
●Type 42. Type 42 fonts are TrueType fonts with headers that enable them to be rendered by
the PS Emulation Driver.
●Don't Send. Use this setting if you do not want any TrueType fonts to be downloaded.
●Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts, measured in pixels (in
pixel size at the current resolution). Use this control to specify the size of the font (in pixels) at
which the PS Emulation Driver driver should switch from downloading TrueType fonts as bitmap
(Type 3) fonts to downloading them as outline (Type 1) fonts.
The most efficient threshold value varies depending on the printing resolution. For example, at 300
dpi, downloading TrueType fonts as outlines becomes efficient when fonts are about 25 points or
larger. If this value is 0, outline (Type 1) fonts are always sent.
●Favor system TrueType fonts over printer fonts that have the same name. Use this option to
specify whether to use system TrueType fonts instead of printer fonts when the same font is found
on both the computer and the printer. Printer fonts are the default.
Using printer fonts can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be
downloaded. However, the fonts in the printed document might not exactly match the fonts on the
screen.
●Send PostScript fonts as:. Use this option to specify whether to download PostScript fonts to the
printer. The following options are available:
●In Native Format. Click this option to download the PostScript font files to the product before
the document prints.
●Don't Send. If you click this option, no fonts are downloaded. This does not affect downloading
of TrueType fonts.
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Fonts tab to their original values.
Device Options tab features
To gain access to the Device Options tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Device Options tab.
176 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
The Device Options tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print driver.
When the driver is opened from within a software program, the Device Options tab includes only the
Printer features controls. When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Options tab appears as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-39 Device Options tab
NOTE Changes that you make to the Device Options tab are not reflected in the Properties
settings until the modified device settings have been applied and the Properties tabs have been
re-opened. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Device
Options tab, click Apply, close the Properties tabs, and then re-open the Properties tabs.
The Device Options tab contains the following options:
●Available printer memory
●Printer features
●Using job-storage features when printing
●Installable options
●Restore Defaults
NOTE Use the dynamic Change settings for: control in the Printer features and the
Installable options sections of the Device Options tab to change the setting for the feature or
option that you have selected.
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 177
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Available printer memory
The Available printer memory control specifies the amount of memory in the product. If the value in
this control does not match the amount of memory in the printer model, use the spin box to specify the
correct amount of memory.
Printer features
The Printer features group box shows settings that are specific to the printer. You can change the
settings by selecting the setting you want to change and then specifying a new value in the Change
setting for list.
The following are the printer-feature settings available on this tab:
●HPPJLEncoding
●Job storage
●User Name
●PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)
●PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)
●PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)
●PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)
●Print Color as Gray
●Collate
●Fit to Page
●Color Options
●Color Themes for RGB Color
●Color Themes for CMYK Color
●Edge Control
●Text Neutral Grays
●Text Halftone
●Graphic Neutral Grays
●Graphic Halftone
●Photographs Neutral Grays
●Photographs Halftone
●Watermark (Pages per Sheet)
●Print Watermark
●Watermark
●Watermark Font
178 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
●Watermark Size
●Watermark Angle
●Watermark Style
●Watermark Color
●Watermark Intensity
HPPJLEncoding
The HPPJLEncoding feature contains the control for the UTF8 feature.
Job storage
The default value for this setting is Off, which means that the print job will not be stored in the product.
NOTE The job-storage feature requires at least 128 MB of total memory or the installation of a
printer hard disk. The printer hard disk is available as an optional accessory for all models.
If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total
memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
●Proof and Hold
●Private Job
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 179
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is
installed:
●Quick Copy
●Stored Job
●Quick Copy. When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job
is stored on the product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product
control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using
the product control panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-
and-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION
menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites
the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as
one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick
Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
●Proof and Hold.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job,
allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining
copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that
can be stored in the product at the product control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If
more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second
proof-and-hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-
hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing
job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-
and-hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION
menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites
the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as
one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
●Private Job. When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed
until you request the job at the product control panel. The print job can be printed only after you
type the correct PIN at the control panel.
After selecting Private Job from the Device Options tab, scroll to the PIN digit 1 (for Private
Job) control, click to select it, and then select a number from the Change setting for: PIN digit 1
(for Private Job) list. Repeat this process to select a number for each of the remaining three PIN
digits. If you do not select a PIN, the default PIN of 0000 is used.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. This feature
is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave
in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software
program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing
private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing
job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
●Stored Job. To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the
job-storage feature must be enabled.
180 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it.
The print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored
on the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the
same user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when the product is
turned off. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable the
job-storage feature, click Start, select Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product
name, click Properties, click the Device Options tab, select Job Storage: from the Printer
features list, and then select Disabled in the Change setting for: Job Storage list.
To gain access to the Job Storage tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Start on the Windows
task bar, click Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click the product name, and then click
Properties.
User Name
User Name. The default value for this setting is System Name (if available). Additional values for this
setting include numbers 1 through 20.
PIN digit 1 (for Private Job)
The default value for the PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using
this setting, see Private Job.
PIN digit 2 (for Private Job)
The default value for the PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using
this setting, see Private Job.
PIN digit 3 (for Private Job)
The default value for the PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using
this setting, see Private Job.
PIN digit 4 (for Private Job)
The default value for the PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) setting is 0. For more information about using
this setting, see Private Job.
Print Color as Gray
The Print Color as Gray feature contains the following options:
●Off (default)
●On
Collate
The Collate feature contains the following options:
●On (turn off in application)
●Off
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 181
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Fit to Page
The Fit to Page feature contains the following options:
●Prompt User for correct size (default)
●Nearest Size and Scale
●Nearest Size and Crop
●Letter
●A4
Color Options
The Color Options feature contains the following options:
●Automatic (default)
●Manual
Color Themes for RGB Color
The Color Themes for RGB Color feature contains the following options:
●Default (sRGB). Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer
to interpret RGB color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide
Web Consortium (WC3). Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to
provide vivid images and graphics.
●Image Optimization (sRGB). Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which
the content is mainly bitmap images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the printer
to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster
data; it has no effect on text or vector-based graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this
setting provides the maximum enhancement.
●Adobe RGB (1998). Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space
rather than sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RGB, and
documents that are produced with Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When
printing from a professional software program that uses Adobe RGB, turn off the color management
in the software program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.
●None. Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render
documents correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software
program in the operating system.
NOTE To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the
procedures for managing color in the software program or the operating system.
●Custom Profile. Select Custom Profile when you want to simulate the printed output from other
printers or for using special effects. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input profile
to more accurately predict and control color output.
The default Custom Profile is the color table used on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. The
product holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color
table, it erases the default color table and installs the new one.
182 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
You can download custom profiles from the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware
Color Themes for CMYK Color
The Color Themes for CMYK Color feature contains the following options:
●Default CMYK+. Select Default CMYK+ to enable a high-quality default CMYK print path. This
option can be selected for most digital commercial print jobs and should produce optimal prints.
●SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publications) is a common ink standard in the United States
of America and other countries/regions.
●Euroscale, also known as Euro Standard, is a common ink standard in Europe and other countries/
regions.
●DIC. DIC (Dainippon Ink and Chemical) is a common ink standard in Japan and other countries/
regions.
●Custom Profile. Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output
(for example, to emulate a specific HP Color LaserJet printer). Download color profiles from the
following Web site:
www.hp.com/go
Edge Control
The Edge Control feature contains the following options:
●Maximum
●Normal (default)
●Light
●Off
Text Neutral Grays
The Text Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:
●Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This
option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for
the Text and Graphics components. Black Only is the default setting for Text.
●4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces
smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible
black.
Text Halftone
The Text Halftone feature contains the following options:
●Smooth
●Detail
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 183
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Graphic Neutral Grays
The Graphic Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:
●Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This
option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for
the Text and Graphics components. Black Only is the default setting for Text.
●4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces
smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible
black.
Graphic Halftone
The Graphic Halftone feature contains the following options:
●Smooth
●Detail
Photographs Neutral Grays
The Photographs Neutral Grays feature contains the following options:
●Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This
option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for
the Text and Graphics components.
●4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces
smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible
black. 4-Color is the default setting for Text.
Photographs Halftone
The Photographs Halftone feature contains the following options:
●Smooth
●Detail
Watermark (Pages per Sheet)
The Watermark (Pages per Sheet) feature contains the following options:
●1 (default)
●> = 2
Print Watermark
The Print Watermark feature contains the following options:
●No (default)
●All Pages
●First Page Only
184 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Watermark
The Watermark feature contains the following options:
●None (default)
●Draft
●Company Confidential
●Company Proprietary
●Company Private
●Confidential
●Copy
●Copyright
●File Copy
●Final
●For Internal Use Only
●Preliminary
●Proof
●Review Copy
●Sample
●Top Secret
●Urgent
●Custom
Watermark Font
The Watermark Font feature contains the following options:
●Courier Bold
●Helvetica Bold (default)
●Times Bold
Watermark Size
Watermark Size. Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. The default is 48
points.
Watermark Angle
Watermark Angle. Settings for the watermark angle range from 90° to -90° in 15° intervals. The default
is a 45° angle.
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 185
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Watermark Style
The Watermark Style feature contains the following options:
●Narrow Outline
●Medium Outline (default)
●Wide Outline
●Wide Halo Outline
●Filled
Watermark Color
The Watermark Color feature contains the following options:
●Gray
●Red
●Orange
●Yellow
●Green
●Blue
●Violet
Watermark Intensity
The Watermark Intensity feature contains the following options:
●Darkest
●Darker
●Dark
●Medium Dark
●Medium
●Medium Light
●Light
●Lighter
●Lightest
186 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Using job-storage features when printing
To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1. Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
job-storage features.
2. Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Job Storage tab.
4. Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any
required fields.
5. Click OK.
Releasing a job-storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the
product control panel.
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product
control panel, and then press .
3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .
4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .
5. Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
6. Press .
7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then
press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this
step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
8. Press and to select the number of copies to print.
9. Press to print the job.
Deleting a job-storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the
product control panel.
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product
control panel, and then press .
3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .
4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 187
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
5. Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
6. Press .
7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then
press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this
step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
8. Press to delete the job.
Installable options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The following controls are available:
●Tray 3
●Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
●Mopier Mode
●Printer Hard Disk
●Job storage
●VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product.
Tray 3
This control specifies whether you have an additional 500-sheet feeder tray (Tray 3) installed on the
printer. The default setting is Uninstalled.
Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which
allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for the
following media types:
●Transparency
●Labels
●Extra Heavy
●Cardstock
●Tough Paper
●Envelope
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports smart duplexing. The printer detects
information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit
only if printable information appears on the second side of the page.
188 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces
network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder
of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be
created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using
a photocopier.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier
Mode: setting on the Device Options tab is Enabled.
Printer Hard Disk
When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode option are enabled in the
print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control
panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple,
collated copies from a single print job.
Job storage
When the job-storage feature is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access
to those print jobs later at the control panel.
VMOption. This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the product.
The following options are available:
●64 MB (default)
●96 MB
●128 MB
●160 MB
●192 MB
●256 MB
●288 MB
●320 MB
●384 MB
●512 MB
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Device Options tab to their original values.
PostScript tab features
To gain access to the PostScript tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 189
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
3. Click Printers.
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the PostScript tab.
The PostScript tab controls the PostScript functions for the PS Emulation Driver. The following figure
shows the PostScript tab.
Figure 3-40 PostScript tab
The PostScript tab contains the following controls and options:
●PostScript output format
●PostScript header
●Print PostScript error information
●PostScript timeout values
●Advanced…
●Restore Defaults
190 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
PostScript output format
Use the PostScript output format list to specify the format for PostScript files. The following options
are available:
●PostScript (optimize for speed). Use this setting for printing most documents.
●Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document
Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This
is useful, for instance, if you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different printer.
●Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another
document that is to be printed from a different program.
●Archive Format. Use this setting to create a PostScript file that you can use later.
●PJL archive format. This setting notifies the printer that the document is being printed in a different
printer language.
PostScript header
Use the PostScript header options to specify whether to send header information to the product each
time you print a document. The following options are available:
●Download header with each print job. This is the default setting and is sufficient or most types
of printing. Use this setting if you print to a shared network product or to a file on a disk.
●Assume header is downloaded and retained. If you print to a local printer, you can save printing
time by sending the header information to the product only once.
●Send Header Now. Click this button to send header information to the product. This option is
unavailable when you specify EPS, Archive, or PJL Archive formats.
Print PostScript error information
Use the Send PostScript error information option to print postscript error messages after the
document has been printed. The PS Emulation Driver can detect certain errors that Microsoft Windows
cannot. If you are having printing problems, click this option. This information can help you, a system
administrator, or a product-support representative determine what caused the problem. The error
message information is not included in EPS format.
PostScript timeout values
Use the following options to specify the postscript timeout values for the printer.
●Job timeout. This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to
the product before the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the
product continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin
box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
●Wait timeout. This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information
from the computer. After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document
and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want
to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting
is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 191
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
Advanced…
Click Advanced … to open the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box, which appears in the
following figure.
Figure 3-41 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box
The following options are available on the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box:
●PostScript Language Level
●Bitmap compression
●Data format
●Send CTRL+D before job
●Send CTRL+D after job
PostScript Language Level
The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the highest
level that the product supports. Some products support multiple levels. It is usually best to select the
highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more features. In some
instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file
will be printed by someone who has a level-1 product, you would need to select level 1.
You can choose between PostScript Level 1 and PostScript Level 2 features for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800.
Bitmap compression
Use this control to specify whether to compress graphics before sending your document to the product.
If you are using PostScript level 2, or if you are using PostScript level 1 and a product connected to a
serial port, click Compress bitmap images. If you are using PostScript level 1 and a product connected
to a parallel port or if you are using a network product, click No bitmap compression.
192 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
Data format
This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available:
●ASCII data. This is the default setting. When you click ASCII data, data is sent in ASCII format (7-
bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial,
parallel, or network port.
●Binary communications protocol. When you click Binary communications protocol, the
product sends all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format. This format can
be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and is faster than sending data in ASCII format.
If you select this option, click Send Mode to switch the product to Binary Communications Protocol
(BCP) for future print jobs.
NOTE This option is available only if the computer is connected to the product through a
direct connection (a USB or parallel cable).
●Tagged binary communications protocol. When you click Tagged Binary Communications
Protocol, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary
formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data
in ASCII format.
●Pure binary data. When you click Pure binary data, all data except special control characters is
sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications
ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Send CTRL+D before job
This control specifies whether the product is reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The
default setting is off (unselected). Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that
previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the
product is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product that is
connected through parallel or serial ports, select the Send CTRL+D before job check box.
Send CTRL+D after job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The
default setting is off (unselected). Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future
print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is
connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network product, click to
select the Send CTRL+D before job check box.
Restore Defaults
Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the PostScript tab to their original values.
ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 193
HP traditional print
drivers for Windows
194 Chapter 3 HP traditional print drivers for Windows ENWW
4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation
unidrivers for Windows
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the HP Color LaserJet 3800 unidrivers. The unidrivers are the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver
(PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit).
NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers
in various operating systems, see Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems.
You can control print jobs from several places:
●the product control panel
●the software program print dialog box
●the driver user interface
Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the
media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take
precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override product control-panel
settings.
When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003,
the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver
can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.
The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6 Unidriver,
the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver
This chapter also describes differences between the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and
the PS Emulation Unidriver. Unless otherwise noted, features described here apply to all three.
This chapter contains the following sections:
●Access to print drivers
●Help system
●Advanced tab features
●Paper/Quality tab features
ENWW Introduction 195
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●Effects tab features
●Finishing tab features
●Job Storage tab features
●Color tab features
●Services tab features
●Device Settings tab features
●About tab features
196 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Access to print drivers
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access
to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:
1. Click File.
2. Click Print.
3. Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These
driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
You can control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. Here you have access to two sets of driver
tabs: the Printing Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings that you make on the
Printing Preferences driver tabs control the driver default settings for each user's profile. Installable
options can be configured in Properties driver tabs.
Printing Preferences driver tabs
The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software
programs. To gain access to these tabs, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available:
●Advanced
●Paper/Quality
●Effects
●Finishing
●Job Storage
●Color
●Services
The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled on the tab. The settings
take effect only after you click OK on the Device Settings tab.
ENWW Access to print drivers 197
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Properties driver tabs
This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties
tabs, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
The following Properties print-driver tabs are available:
●General
●Sharing
●Ports
●Advanced
●Color Management
●Security
●Device Settings
●About
198 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Help system
The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a full-featured
Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers, is not available in the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver.
What's this? Help
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support What's this? Help. You can gain
access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
●Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
●Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.
●Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message
appears.
Incompatible Print Settings messages
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response
to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible
given the product capabilities or the current settings of other controls.
NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept
some settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. Sending a job with
incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check
the product documentation for the product capabilities.
In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically
invalid print-driver configurations result in warning messages. Duplexing, for example, is not possible
when the Transparency media type is selected. The following figure shows an Incompatible Print
Settings message.
ENWW Help system 199
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message
To accept the change that was just made, click the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option
and then click OK. The driver resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new
value.
If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the conflict myself and then click OK.
NOTE In this example, the conflict can be resolved manually. If the conflict is not resolved when
the driver is closed, then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the product.
200 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Advanced tab features
To gain access to the Advanced tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Advanced tab.
Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special controls
that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and copies in the driver
(although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the
page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab.
Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
●Paper/Output
ENWW Advanced tab features 201
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●Graphic
●Document Options
Paper/Output
The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls:
●Copy Count setting
●Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count)
Copy Count
Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs
that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy count
in the software program.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the number
by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are
numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when
the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used.
When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as
non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed
to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not
take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in
the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It
is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Collated
The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes
available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.
When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of
each page print together.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box. Settings
in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using Microsoft Word,
the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the
Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes
precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated
printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program. Similarly, if the
Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software
program, the printed output is uncollated.
202 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Graphic
The Graphic setting contains the following controls:
●Image Color Management settings
●True Type Font settings
Image Color Management
This control lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics.
ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for programs to adjust colors before
printing so that the color of images on the screen more closely match the color of those images when
they are printed. The following options are available:
●ICM Method. The ICM Method setting specifies how to print color graphics.
●To enable Image Color Management, click the option and then select ICM Enabled.
●If you want the host computer to perform calculations for color matching before it sends the
document to the product, click ICM Handled by Host System.
●If you want the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to perform calculations for color matching, click
ICM Handled by Printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors is created and
downloaded to the product. The product uses these rules to adjust colors in the document.
●ICM Intent. The ICM Intent setting specifies how color images are created to produce the image
that looks best on the printed page.
●If you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors, click Graphics.
●For photographs or pictures where the colors blend together, click Pictures to maximize the
contrast.
●If your document uses a color that you need to match exactly, and you are sending the
document to a product that has that specific color of ink, click Proof.
●If you want to preview the color settings from another product, click Match.
True Type Font
Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) to print documents that contain TrueType fonts
by using equivalent printer fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special characters
that the equivalent printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download TrueType
fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.
Document Options
The Document Options setting contains the following controls:
●Advanced Printing Features
●Print Optimizations
Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available,
ENWW Advanced tab features 203
HP unidrivers for
Windows
depending on your product. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the
default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some
advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been
disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the
Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled.
Print Optimizations
NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5
Unidriver. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your document
contains overlapping text and graphics, the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly.
If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When this feature is disabled, print
optimization-features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal
and vertical rules, are turned off.
PostScript Options
NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the PS Emulation Unidriver. They are
not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver.
Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop-down menu:
●Optimize for Speed. This is the default setting.
●Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document
Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document is a self-contained object. This option
is useful if you want to create a postscript file and print it on a different printer.
●Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another
document that is to be printed from another program.
●Archive format. Use this option to create a postscript file that you can use later.
Select one of the following settings in the TrueType Font Download drop-down menu:
●Automatic. This is the default setting. The PS Emulation Driver determines which format is best.
●Outline. Select this option if you want to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font.
●Bitmap. Select this option to download the TrueType font as a bitmap font.
●Native TrueTypeIf the printer is a TrueType rasterizer printer; select this option to download the
TrueType font as an outline font.
Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Language Level drop-down menu:
●3
●2
●1
The default setting is 3. It is usually better to select the highest number available, because it provides
more features. In some instances, lower numbers might be necessary. For example, if you are printing
a file to disk and that file is to be printed by someone with a level-1 printer, select 1.
204 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Select one of the following settings in the Send PostScript Error Handler drop-down menu:
●Yes. This is the default setting. When an error occurs in the print job, an error page is sent to the
printer.
●No. Select this setting if you do not want an error page to be printed when an error occurs.
Printer Features
The Printer Features setting contains the following controls:
●Print All Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver
prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black,
except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor
does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
●Send True Type as Bitmap
NOTE The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and
HP PCL 5 unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble using
TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is
Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before
downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as
outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.
●Graphics Mode
NOTE The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver. It is not
available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings:
●Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the product as a
combination of HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting
might produce higher-quality output. It is the default setting.
●Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the product as images
composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
●Alternative Letterhead Mode
When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a
tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for
printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either
face-up or face-down, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown.
When this option is selected, you must use one of the following options in the Type is setting:
●Letterhead
●Preprinted
ENWW Advanced tab features 205
HP unidrivers for
Windows
NOTE Alternative Letterhead Mode is available only if the printer is equipped with an
automatic duplexing unit.
●Raster Compression
NOTE The Raster Compression option is available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver. It is
not available in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method:
●Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use.
●Best Quality. This option forces the software to use a lossless compression method.
(Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.)
●Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this option requires the software to always use
a lossy compression method (some data is lost).
Layout Options
The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting.
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints
the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last.
NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual
logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than
one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change.
206 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features
To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab
to specify different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back
cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab.
Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following control sets:
●Print Task Quick Sets
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 207
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●Paper Options
●Use Different Paper/Covers
●Document preview image
●HP Digital Imaging
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because
they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the
Paper/Quality tab affects all the Printing Preferences driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick
Sets setting:
●Paper/Quality
●Effects
●Finishing
●Job Storage
●Color
Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available). Print
Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing
specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control
does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.
The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
●Default Print Settings
●User Guide Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that
existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that
are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been
changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no
other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings
match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label
that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the HP Driver
Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
208 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
1
Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Available, not selected Yes
Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
Booklet Layout Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable, Off Yes
Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
1 page per sheet Yes
Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable Yes
Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group
box
Unavailable Yes
Orientation Finishing tab, Orientation group box Portrait Yes
Rotate by 180
degrees
Finishing tab, Orientation group box Available, not selected Yes
Resizing Options Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Actual Size Yes
Print document on Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, not selected Yes
Size to print on Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Actual Size Yes
Scale to Fit Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Unavailable, selected Yes
% of Normal Size Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, not selected Yes
Watermarks Effects tab (none) Yes
Watermarks First
Page Only
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable, not
selected
Yes
Current watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none) Yes
Watermark
Message
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
(none) Yes
2
Watermark
Message Angle
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Diagonal Yes
2
Watermark
Message Angle
(angle)
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box
(Click Edit for Watermark Details.)
Unavailable unless
the Angle option is
selected, 52 degrees
Yes
Watermark Font
Name
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Arial Yes
2
Watermark Font
Color
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Gray Yes
2
Watermark Font
Shading
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Very Light Yes
2
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 209
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
1
Watermark Font
Size
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
80 No
Watermark Font
Style
Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog
box, Font Attributes group box
Regular Yes
2
Size is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Letter Yes
Use Different Paper Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Available, not selected No
Source is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Automatically Select Yes
Type is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group
box
Unspecified Yes
Economode Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality dialog box Available, unselected Yes
Contrast
Enhancement
Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Available, Off No
Digital Flash Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Available, Off No
SmartFocus Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Available, Off No
Sharpness Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Available, Off No
Smoothing Paper/Quality tab, HP Digital Imaging
Options dialog box
Available, Off No
Unlabeled group
box
Job Storage tab Status message: for
example, Your job
will be printed but
not stored on the
printer
No
Job Storage Mode Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Off is selected No
Proof and Hold Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Available, not selected No
Private Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Available, not selected No
Quick Copy Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Available, not selected No
Stored Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Available, not selected No
Require PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group
box
Unavailable, not
selected
No
Windows User
Name
Job Storage tab, User Name group box Unavailable, selected
(Windows User Name
appears in field)
No
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued)
210 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for
U.S. English Print
Task Quick Sets
Preconfigurable
1
PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Require PIN group box Unavailable, not
selected
No
Display Job ID when
printing
Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options
group box
Unavailable, selected No
Job Name Job Storage tab, Job Name group box Unavailable,
Automatically
selected
No
Automatic (color
options)
Color tab, Color Options group box Selected Yes
Manual (color
options)
Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not selected Yes
Print in Grayscale Color tab, Color Options group box Available, not selected Yes
Edge Control Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab)
Normal Yes
Neutral Grays (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab.)
Black Only Yes
Halftone (text) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab.)
Detail Yes
Neutral Grays
(graphics)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab.)
Black Only Yes
Halftone (graphics) Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab.)
Detail Yes
Neutral Grays
(photographs)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab.)
4-Color Yes
Halftone
(photographs)
Color tab, Color Settings dialog box (Click
Settings on Color tab.)
Detail Yes
RGB Color Color tab, Color Themes group box Default (sRGB) Yes
1
These features can be preconfigured by using one of the HP driver preconfiguration tools. For more information, See HP Driver
Preconfiguration, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw.
2
Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the
HP Color LaserJet 3000/3600/3800 User Guide.
When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings,
except for the following settings:
●On the Paper/Quality tab, Type Is: is set to Unspecified.
●On the Finishing tab, Print on Both Sides is set to ON.
●On the Finishing tab, Flip Pages Up is set to ON.
Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer (continued)
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 211
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●On the Finishing tab, Pages per Sheet is set to 2 pages per sheet.
●On the Finishing tab, Page Order is set to Right then Down.
Type new Quick Set name here
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to save
the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type
the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are
saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it from the drop-down menu and
click Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use.
You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save
more, a message box appears that states: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please
delete some before adding new ones.
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the
pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections
that are available by default.
Figure 4-4 Paper Options group box
212 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:
●Size is
●Custom Paper Size
●Source is
●Type is
●Use Different Paper/Covers
Size is
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a
gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Because media-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to
use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs that do not include
a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not
require different media sizes.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media
sizes within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the product,
a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray.
For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes section of this STR.
When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the
Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information,
see the Use Different Paper/Covers section in this chapter.
Custom Paper Size
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click Custom… on the Paper/Quality tab. The
following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 213
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Figure 4-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box
Name
Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size.
The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions:
●If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/
Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size.
●If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box
shows the default name of "Custom."
●If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or
renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved
or the dialog box is closed.
If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click Save, you can change the width
and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking Save,
any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.
Paper size
The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper
Size group box.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the
maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height
control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.
If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest
whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole
millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated
when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement
units.
214 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Units
To change measurement units, click one of the options in the Units group box (either Inches or
Millimeters).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum media size for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and
the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits
for each media-handling device.
Table 4-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 (100-sheet
multipurpose)
Width 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) 215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 3 (500-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Duplexing unit Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Source is
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed
through the Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been
installed on the product:
●Automatically select
●Printer Auto Select
●Manual Feed in Tray 1
●Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)
●Tray 2 (250-sheet tray)
●Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP Color LaserJet 3800
uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray
other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.
For information about media sources, see the Media attributes section of this STR.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 215
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Type is
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports.
When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually
Plain.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can
be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the
product when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the
information an updated list of media types is returned. If bidirectional communication is not enabled,
then the driver looks for custom media types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional
communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the
driver.
The following standard types appear in the list:
●Unspecified
●Plain
●Preprinted
●Letterhead
●Transparency
●Prepunched
●Labels
●Bond
●Recycled
●Color
●Light 60-75 g/m2(16.4–20.5 lb)
●Intermediate 90-104 g/m2 (24.7–28.5 lb)
●Heavy 105-120 g/m2 (28.8–32.9 lb)
●Extra Heavy 120-163 g/m2 (32.9–44.7 lb)
●Cardstock 164-220 g/m2 (45–60.3 lb)
●Rough
●Glossy 106-120 g/m2 (29.1–32.9 lb)
●Tough Paper (Glossy Film)
●Envelope
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different
setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is:
setting. For more information about media types, see the Media attributes section of this STR.
When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the product, a
control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray.
216 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Use Different Paper/Covers
You can print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the
group box, along with the associated options:
●Front Cover
●First Page
●Other Pages
●Last Page
●Back Cover
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections.
Front Cover
Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include
a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options.
Figure 4-6 Front Cover options
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 217
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The following are the Front Cover options:
●Size is: drop-down menu
●Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus
become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are
installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source
is: setting, see the Source is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is section of this
chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain
configured until you close the software program.
First Page
Use the First Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the first page of a document.
The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use
Different Paper/Covers check box.
218 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 4-7 First Page options
The following are the First Page options:
●Size is: drop-down menu
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Other Pages
Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the other pages of the
document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select
the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 219
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Figure 4-8 Other Pages options
The following are the Other Pages options:
●Size is: drop-down menu
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers
options.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the
Device Settings tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see the
Source is section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Last Page
Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a
document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select
the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
220 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 4-9 Last Page options
The following are the Last Page options:
●Size is: drop-down menu
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the description for Type is: in the Type
is section of this chapter.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
Back Cover
Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to include
a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options.
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 221
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Figure 4-10 Back Cover options
The following are the Back Cover options:
●Size is: drop-down menu
●Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
●Source is: drop-down menu
●Type is: drop-down menu
The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size
is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box
to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus
become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting
is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would
otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are
installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the product supports.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/
Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/
Covers options.
When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select
remain configured until you close the software program.
222 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver
tabs:
●Paper/Quality
●Effects
●Finishing
●Color
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
HP Digital Imaging
Click HP Digital Imaging to open the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box, which is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 4-11 HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box
The following settings can be adjusted on the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box:
●Contrast Enhancement
●Digital Flash
●SmartFocus
●Sharpness
●Smoothing
ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 223
HP unidrivers for
Windows
The HP Digital Imaging settings should be used only on high-resolution images (600 dpi or higher) that
are printed on photograph-quality paper. These settings are not recommended for text.
For the Contrast Enhancement, Digital Flash, SmartFocus, and Smoothing settings, the following
controls are available:
●Automatic check box
●A slide bar ranging from Off to High
The SharpFocus settings are Off and On.
Use the following controls to enhance digital images:
●Contrast Enhancement. Use the Contrast Enhancement setting to increase image contrast for
a more visually pleasing result. This filter is useful with flat images (images in which much of the
image content is compressed into a small, dynamic range of pixel values). Flat images can result
from low lighting, environmental haze, or camera or scanner limitations.
●Digital Flash. Use the Digital Flash setting to adjust lighting levels to reveal areas in shadow. The
filter locates dark areas in an image and brings out detail without degrading other features in the
image.
●Sharpness. Many images are improved by increasing their sharpness. Use the Sharpness feature
to make edge detail more prominent. The filter detects regions that contain significant variations
in pixel value along a number of different vectors (which denotes edges) and then applies a filter
to enhance detail.
●SmartFocus. Use the SmartFocus setting to increase the apparent resolution of lower resolution
images. Many images that are downloaded from the Internet or from digital cameras can be
compressed because of size restrictions, and might exhibit pixilation artifacts when printed.
SmartFocus upscales the image to the printer resolution without accentuating these artifacts.
●Smoothing. Just as many images benefit from increased sharpness, many images are improved
by smoothing, which decreases noise artifacts that digital cameras or scanners often create. When
you select Smoothing, the filter locates areas that contain abrupt changes in pixel value by
comparison with surrounding pixels (which denotes noise) and then applies a filter to smooth the
output.
224 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Effects tab features
To gain access to the Effects tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Effects tab.
Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure
shows the Effects tab.
Figure 4-12 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
●Print Task Quick Sets
●Resizing Options
ENWW Effects tab features 225
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●Document preview image
●Watermarks
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this STR.
Resizing Options
The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:
●Actual Size (default)
●Print Document On setting
●Scale to Fit option
●% of Normal Size setting
Actual Size
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.
Print Document On
Click the Print Document On option to format the document for one media size and then print the
document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
●The % of Normal Size value is not 100.
●The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can
print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any
custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically
selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected
media.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the
target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting
is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size
on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image
is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview
images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On check box selected,
and the target size specified as Letter.
226 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 4-13 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the
target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default
setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected
within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does
not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and
sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those
limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another
control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upper-
left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator
is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the
arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the slider-
bar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type
the value into the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
●Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected
●Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver
tabs:
●Paper/Quality
●Effects
ENWW Effects tab features 227
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●Finishing
●Color
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or
edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
●(none)
●Confidential
●Draft
●SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system,
plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any
watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the
document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
Figure 4-14 Watermark Details dialog box
228 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and
controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However,
clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select
a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes
can be canceled.
Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the
Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details
dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning
appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to
keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the
Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size. When
this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2).
When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then
the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the
page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects
only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:
●Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the
lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
●Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right
edges of the page.
●Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric
spin box to select the angle.
ENWW Effects tab features 229
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
●Name
The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is
language-dependent.
●Color
The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:
●Gray
●Red
●Yellow
●Green
●Cyan
●Blue
●Magenta
●Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of
shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
●Lightest
●Very Light (default)
●Light
●Medium Light
●Medium
●Medium Dark
●Dark
●Very Dark
●Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly
saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select
Darkest to produce a black watermark.
●Size
230 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is language-
dependent.
●Style
The following settings are available:
●Regular
●Bold
●Italic
●Bold Italic
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default watermark settings
The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.
Table 4-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks
Setting New watermark Preset watermark
Name Arial Varies by language
Color Gray Gray
Shading Very Light Very Light
Size 80 Varies by language
Style Regular Regular
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking
Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a
different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes
can be canceled.
ENWW Effects tab features 231
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Finishing tab features
To gain access to the Finishing tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Finishing tab.
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following figure shows the
Finishing tab.
Figure 4-15 Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
●Print Task Quick Sets
●Document Options
232 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
●Document preview image
●Orientation
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Paper/Quality
tab features.
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
●Print on Both Sides
●Flip Pages Up
●Booklet layout
●Pages per Sheet
●Print Page Borders
●Page Order
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
●Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any media type except for the following types:
●Labels
●Transparency
●Envelope
●Extra Heavy
●Cardstock
●Tough Paper
●Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes:
●Statement
●Envelope #10
●Envelope DL
●Envelope C5
●Envelope B5
ENWW Finishing tab features 233
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●Envelope Monarch
●Double Postscard (JIS)
Automatically printing on both sides
The duplexing unit in the product prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both
Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with a duplexing
unit installed in the following models:
●HP Color LaserJet 3800dn
●HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn
These printer models support smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing
performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going
through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.
All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on
both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types:
●Prepunched
●Preprinted
●Letterhead
When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make
adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer
to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best
possible quality. This group of settings is known as print mode. A different print mode is used with each
media type. Print-mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic.
Manually printing on both sides
●Manually Print on 2nd Side is not selected
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for
the HP Color LaserJet 3800 and HP Color LaserJet 3800n printer models, which do not have a
duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer models for media types that are not available when using the
automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6,
PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled
in the driver, the printer automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for
automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, and 8.5 x 13 only), and forces manual printing on both sides
for media types that are not supported.
Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The
following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
●Plain
●Preprinted
●Letterhead
234 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
●Prepunched
●Bond
●Recycled
●Color
●Rough
NOTE To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document
options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the Properties
print-driver tabs. See Installable Options in the Device Settings tab features section of this
chapter.
If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic
duplexing, you must select and apply the Not Installed setting on the Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided
Printing) option on the Device Settings tab.
Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode.
Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side.
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:
1. Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.
2. Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.
3. When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which
the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.
Figure 4-16 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box
When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints
on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support
odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.
ENWW Finishing tab features 235
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Flip Pages Up
Use the Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip
Pages Up check box is not available. It is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, The
following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation
selected on the Finishing tab.
Table 4-4 Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab) Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait Short-edge binding Long-edge binding
Landscape Long-edge binding Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding
along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the
lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on
the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices
that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu
is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that
is set on the Paper/Quality tab:
●Left Edge Binding
●Right Edge Binding
When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes to
show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it
automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to
4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Pages per Sheet section of this
chapter for more information.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages,
Last Page, and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use
Different Paper check box) to select different media for the front cover, first page, other pages, and
back cover. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features in this chapter.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a
booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing
tab to control booklet settings.
236 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
To print a booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.
1. Click File.
2. Click Print.
3. Click Properties.
4. Click the Finishing tab.
5. Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
6. In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for
example, Right Edge Binding).
7. Click OK in the print driver.
8. Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet
of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are
arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-
down menu provides six settings:
●1 page per sheet (this is the default)
●2 pages per sheet
●4 pages per sheet
●6 pages per sheet
●9 pages per sheet
●16 pages per sheet
NOTE When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page
Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the
borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
●Right, then Down
●Down, then Right
ENWW Finishing tab features 237
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●Left, then Down
●Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples
in the following figure.
Figure 4-17 Page-order preview images
●2 pages per sheet
●4 pages per sheet
●6 pages per sheet
●9 pages per sheet
●16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver
tabs:
●Paper/Quality
●Effects
●Finishing
●Color
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds
into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are
portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page
orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
238 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
The Orientation group box contains three options:
●Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media.
●Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media.
●Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is
rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media.
You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If
you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image.
ENWW Finishing tab features 239
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Job Storage tab features
To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Job Storage tab.
NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when a hard disk is installed or at least 128 MB
of total memory is installed and configured.
Use the job-storage feature to store print jobs in the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer memory for printing
at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if job-storage feature is enabled. To support
job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS)
documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory, install
a hard disk, or both. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features.
A hard disk or a minimum total memory of 128 MB is required to use the job-storage features.
After a hard disk or additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes
in the product. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature
can be used to update the drivers. For more information, see the Automatic Configuration section in this
chapter.
To configure the drivers manually after installing a hard disk or additional memory, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and
Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Device Settings tab.
7. If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and
then select either 96 MB, 128 MB, 160 MB, 192 MB, 256 MB, 288 MB, 320 MB, 384 MB,
or 512 MB, depending on the total amount of memory currently installed.
8. If a hard disk has been installed, select Installed for the Printer Hard Disk under Installable
Options, and then select Installed in the drop-down menu.
9. Click OK to make the printer hard disk and job-storage features available.
240 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
NOTE The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is
enabled.
You can disable the job-storage feature while leaving the printer hard disk enabled. To disable the job-
storage feature, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Device Settings tab.
7. Select Job Storage.
8. Select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears.
NOTE When the job-storage feature is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible.
If the job-storage feature is enabled (without installing a hard disk but with at least 128 MB of total
memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab:
●Proof and Hold
●Private Job
Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is
installed:
●Quick Copy
●Stored Job
The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.
ENWW Job Storage tab features 241
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Figure 4-18 Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
NOTE This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing.
●Print Task Quick Sets
●Status group box
●Job Storage Mode
●Require PIN
●Job Notification Options
●User Name
●Job Name
242 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
●Using job-storage features when printing
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the Paper/
Quality tab features section of this STR.
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer to store documents at the
product and then control their printing at the product control panel.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options:
●Off
●Proof and Hold
●Private Job
●Quick Copy
●Stored Job
These options and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print
job will not be stored in the product.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing
you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the
print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in
the product at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the product. If more
copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-
hold job to the product with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and
you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold
jobs are deleted if you turn off the product.
ENWW Job Storage tab features 243
HP unidrivers for
Windows
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-and-
hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and
the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already
stored on the printer hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
Private Job
To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.
When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the product, but is not printed until you request the
job at the product control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can
be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is
immediately deleted from the product. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or
confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you
type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four characters, the
characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string,
but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits.
The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the product. If more copies
are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that
has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original
job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if
you turn off the product.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, a printer hard disk must be installed, and the job-storage feature must
be enabled.
When you select Quick Copy, the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the
product, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the product control panel. The
number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the product is set by using the product control
panel.
NOTE The product configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-and-
hold jobs. The number is set at the product control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and
the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held
document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already
stored on the printer hard disk will overwrite the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted
if you turn off the product.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, a hard disk must be installed on the product and the job-storage feature
must be enabled.
Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk without printing it. The
print job is stored in the product as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored on the
printer hard disk, you can print the job at the product control panel.
244 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
The job remains stored in the product until it is deleted or overwritten by a document that has the same
user name and job name. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when the product is turned off.
Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job.
Select the Require PIN to Print check box to set the private mode. Use a private stored job to send a
print job directly to the product, which can then be printed only after you type a PIN up to 4 digits long
at the product control panel. (You can set the PIN in the PIN group box.)
After the job is printed, the job remains in the product and can be printed again at the product control
panel.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you
select Stored Job. If you select the Require PIN to Print box, you must type a PIN to make the stored
job private.
NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job the previous section. Private jobs
are deleted from the product after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the product
after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed. A printer hard disk is
required for Private stored jobs.
Require PIN
Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected. Select the PIN to Print box, then type a 4-digit
PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must enter the 4-digit
PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
The PIN to Print box is selected, but not available, when Private Job is selected. Type a 4-digit PIN
number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the product, where you must type the 4-digit PIN
on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
Job Notification Options
Clicking a Job Storage Mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become
available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID
when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed.
The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well
as the product name, port, and location.
User Name
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the product control panel. The following are
the User Name settings:
●Windows User Name. This option associates your Windows user name with the stored print job.
The Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the Windows User Name
options.
●Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click Custom,
the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than
16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the
product control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to
uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126
characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow
it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
ENWW Job Storage tab features 245
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Job Name
Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the product control panel. The following
are the Job Name settings:
●<Automatic> This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that
is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the
print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The
file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program
name or a time stamp is used for the job name.
●Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which
<Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string
of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating
system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel
display.
The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase
or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the product control-panel display. If you
try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is
removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16
characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>. The
acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be
of a length and type that can appear on the product control-panel display.
If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the product software
can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will
overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job
because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name,
or when one is created automatically, the product software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the
end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want
the product software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name.
Using job-storage features when printing
To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps:
1. Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using
job-storage features.
2. Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Job Storage tab.
4. Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any
required fields.
5. Click OK.
246 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Releasing a job-storage print job
After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the
product control panel.
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product
control panel, and then press .
3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .
4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .
5. Press and until PRINT is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
6. Press .
7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then
press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this
step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
8. Press and to select the number of copies to print.
9. Press to print the job.
Deleting a job-storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the product hard disk. You can do this from the
product control panel.
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the product
control panel, and then press .
3. Press and to scroll to your user name, and then press .
4. Press and to scroll to the job name, and then press .
5. Press and until DELETE is highlighted on the product control panel, and then press .
6. Press .
7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press and to select the first digit of the PIN, and then
press . The number in the product control-panel display changes to an asterisk. Repeat this
step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number.
If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step.
8. Press to delete the job.
ENWW Job Storage tab features 247
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Color tab features
To gain access to the Color tab, follow these steps:
1. click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Color tab.
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and
halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following
figure.
Figure 4-19 Color tab
The Color tab contains the following sets of controls:
●Print Task Quick Sets
248 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
●Color Options
●Color Themes
●Document preview image
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on each Printing Preference tab, and is used to store
the current combination of driver settings found on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either
preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. For more
information, see Paper tab features.
Color Options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print
job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:
●Automatic option (default)
●Manual option
●Settings button (Click this button to open the Color Settings dialog box.)
●Print in Grayscale check box
Automatic
Use the Automatic option for default color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The
Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color printing needs.
Manual
To change the default color settings, select the Manual option, and then click Settings. The Color
Settings dialog box appears.
To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings
dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with "Custom"
settings.
ENWW Color tab features 249
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Figure 4-20 Color Settings dialog box
The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls:
●General
●Edge Control
●Text
●Neutral Grays
●Halftone
●Graphics
●Neutral Grays
●Halftone
●Photographs
●Neutral Grays
●Halftone
General
Use the General setting group to control Edge Control settings for all color printing.
250 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of three components:
●Adaptive Halftoning, which increases edge sharpness
●Trapping, which reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges
of adjacent objects
●Color Resolution Enhancement Technology (C-REt), which increases the apparent resolution by
placing each dot for the smoothest edges
The Edge Control option offers four settings:
●Off. The Off setting turns Trapping, Adaptive Halftoning, and C-REt to Off.
●Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On and C-REt is
set to On.
●Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to
On, and C-REt is set to On.
●Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On,
and C-REt is set to On.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is
embedded in the product firmware. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text,
graphics, or photographs. The following options are available:
●Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This
option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for
the Text and Graphics components.
●4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces
smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible
black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs.
Halftone
The Halftone setting controls the selection of a product-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded
in the product firmware. Halftoning is a method by which the product mixes the four primary colors (cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black) in varying proportions to create millions of colors. The Halftone options
affect the resolution and clarity of the color on the printed page. You can select Halftone settings for
text, graphics, and photographs independently.
The following Halftone options are available:
●Detail. This is the default option; it is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions
among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option
for sharp edges and detail.
●Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances
photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option for uniform and smooth area
fills.
Color Themes
The Color Themes group box contains the following settings:
ENWW Color tab features 251
HP unidrivers for
Windows
●Default (sRGB)
●Image Optimization (sRGB)
●Adobe RGB (1998)
●None
●Custom Profile
Default (sRGB)
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB color
as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).
Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.
Image Optimization (sRGB)
Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap
images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching for
rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vector-
based graphics. Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum
enhancement.
Adobe RGB (1998)
Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For
example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RBG, and documents that are produced with
Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software
program that uses Adobe RGB , turn off the color management in the software program and allow the
printer software to manage the color space.
None
Select None to instruct the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents correctly
when this option is selected, you must manage color within the software program or the operating
system.
NOTE To prevent poor image quality, use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures
for managing color in the software program or the operating system.
Custom Profile
Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or for using
special effects. This setting instructs the product to use a custom input profile to more accurately predict
and control color output.
The default Custom Profile is an emulation of the color table used on the HP LaserJet 4650 printer. The
printer holds only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it
erases the default color table and installs the new one.
You can download custom profiles from the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware
252 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver
tabs:
●Paper/Quality
●Effects
●Finishing
●Color
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
ENWW Color tab features 253
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Services tab features
To gain access to the Services tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Printing Preferences.
6. Click the Services tab.
The Services tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-21 Services tab
The Services tab contains the following group boxes:
●Internet Services
●Device services
254 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Internet Services
The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop-down menu with the following
selections:
●Online diagnostic tools. This is the HP Instant Support Web site, where you can find interactive
tools and contacts for troubleshooting.
●Support and troubleshooting. This is the main Web site for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer
support.
●Product manuals. View or download HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer manuals.
●Check for driver updates. Automatically check your print drivers to see whether the correct and
most up-to-date print drivers are installed.
●Color printing access/usage. Find information about enabling and disabling color printing and
tracking color print-job usage.
●Order supplies. Shop online for HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supplies.
If you have Internet access, select any of these items and click Go! to open the corresponding HP Web
page.
Device services
Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS. For more
information, see HP Embedded Web Server.
Click the Print color usage job log icon to print a page that shows information about users, print jobs,
and applications that have printed to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
ENWW Services tab features 255
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Device Settings tab features
The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver. To gain access to the Device
Settings tab, follow these steps:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Device Settings tab.
Available options depend on the feature. The following figure shows the Device Settings tab.
Figure 4-22 Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:
●Form to Tray Assignment options
●Font Substitution Table option
●External Fonts option
●Installable Options options
256 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports more than one source of media. You can assign a form
(which defines the media size and margins) to each media source. When a form is matched to a source,
you can select the form when you print. The product prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that
are available in the media-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs.
This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages
that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory
trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1. Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.
2. Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.
4. Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click Cancel to reconfigure all the trays, and
remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab.
Font Substitution Table
Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the product. External
fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Click the Font Substitution Table option to open a list of fonts, as show in the following figure. Use the
settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings.
ENWW Device Settings tab features 257
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Figure 4-23 Font Substitution Table
External Fonts
NOTE The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL unidrivers. It is not
available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can
be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Click the External Fonts option to make the Properties button available. Click Properties to open the
HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
258 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Figure 4-24 HP Font Installer dialog box
Installing external fonts
Follow these steps to install external fonts.
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the name of the product.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Device Settings tab.
7. Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
8. Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
9. Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or
click Browse to locate the file on the computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be
Added window.
10. Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file names
appear in the Installed Font(s) window.
11. Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
Removing external fonts
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the name of the product.
ENWW Device Settings tab features 259
HP unidrivers for
Windows
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Device Settings tab.
7. Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
8. Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. The external fonts that are installed
appear in the Installed Fonts window.
9. Select the fonts that you want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.
10. Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings
The following controls are available and appear only in the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings
tab.
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing
this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the product total physical memory. It is usually
best to set the postscript memory to match what is shown on the configuration page. To print a
configuration page from the product control panel, follow these steps:
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press (the up button) and (the down button) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
.
3. Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4. Press to print the configuration page.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the product uses for print jobs. The following options are available:
●ASCII (default)
●TBCP
●Binary
When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be
sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control
characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial
communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The
binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data
in ASCII format.
260 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document.
The default setting is No. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that previous
print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is
connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a product connected through
parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the product will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The
default setting is Yes. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the product to its default setting to ensure that future print
jobs are not affected by the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the product is
connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes to No.
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in text to the gray provided by the
PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available:
●Yes
●No. This is the default setting.
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in graphics to the gray provided by
the PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available:
●Yes
●No. This is the default setting.
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
This control specifies whether to add the Euro symbol to the printer fonts. The following settings are
available:
●Yes. This is the default setting.
●No
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the product before
the product stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the product continues trying
to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to
a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the product waits to get more postscript information from the computer.
After the specified time passes, the product stops trying to print the document and prints an error
message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value.
If you specify 0 seconds, the product waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can
use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
ENWW Device Settings tab features 261
HP unidrivers for
Windows
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts
as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3)
font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the
Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin box to
change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType fonts
as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type
1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as Bitmap
setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The
default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767
pixels.
Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The following controls are available:
●Automatic Configuration (Off by default)
●Tray 3
●Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing)
●Allow Manual Duplexing
●Printer Memory
●Printer Hard Disk
●Job Storage
●Mopier Mode
●Postscript Pull through (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
Automatic Configuration
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If
bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the
Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an
automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.
If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is
unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
If you have more than one driver installed for the product (for example, the default HP PCL 6 Unidriver
and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which
it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for the specific
product model.
262 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
Tray 3
This control specifies whether you have tray 3, an additional 500-sheet tray, installed on the product.
The default setting is Not Installed.
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
The HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn printer models come with a duplex
unit installed. This setting is enabled (Installed) by default.
NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing. The product uses the smart duplexing
feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the
duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer supports smart duplexing. The product uses the smart
duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the
pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except
transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the
input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.
This setting is enabled by default.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the product. The driver
generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the product can accept. The
driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the product memory.
Printer Hard Disk
When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print
driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel.
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job.
Job storage
When Job Storage is enabled, the product can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those
print jobs later at the control panel.
Mopier Mode
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces
network traffic by transmitting the job to the product once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder
of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be
created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using
a photocopier.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode:
setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled.
ENWW Device Settings tab features 263
HP unidrivers for
Windows
When you use the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, or PS Emulation Unidriver, mopying is
performed in one of two ways: either through the software or through the product hardware. When the
mopier is enabled, mopying takes place through the product hardware by default. One copy of a multiple-
page print job is transmitted once through the network to the product, together with a printer job language
(PJL) command directing the product to make the specified number of copies.
When you disable the mopier, you are not necessarily disabling mopying, which the driver can still
perform through the software rather than the product hardware (the mopying path that is disabled when
you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, a multiple-copy print job that is sent when
the mopier is disabled loses the advantage of transmitting the print job once, because the job is sent
through the network for each copy.
Mopier mode and collation
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. Mopying, the ability to
send original print jobs to the product, is performed by the print driver. Collating can be controlled by
either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by default in
the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to
Disabled.
Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the
Advanced tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count option is
set to more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make
sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the
software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected
result", shows how a 3-page print job would appear.
Table 4-5 Driver mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier mode Application collation Driver collation Expected result
Disabled Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated
Disabled Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated
Disabled Selected Not selected 3 copies collated
Disabled Selected Selected 3 copies collated
Enabled Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated
Enabled Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated
Enabled Selected Not selected 3 copies collated
Enabled Selected Selected 3 copies collated
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript
passthough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript
driver. Options such as Watermarks, n-up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from some
software programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send postscript
264 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
information to the printer that cannot be controlled by the driver. Other programs might print using these
options without problems. Select Disabled and print the document again if you encounter problems.
NOTE In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough can cause unexpected results within
a software program.
ENWW Device Settings tab features 265
HP unidrivers for
Windows
About tab features
The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the print driver Properties,
click Start on the Window task bar, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers
and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware
Devices (Windows XP Home). Right-click the product name, and then click Properties.
1. Click Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4. Right-click the product name.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the About tab.
The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in
parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components.
The information varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 model number, driver, date, and
versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-25 About tab
The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates
whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver
was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
266 Chapter 4 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows ENWW
5 Installing Windows printing-system
components
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft® Windows and
Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is
available on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system
software installation for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, see Supported operating systems.
This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-
system software for Windows operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:
●Windows
●Font support
●General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating systems
●Installing from the printing-system CD
●Installing from a network or from downloaded files
●Detailed Windows installation
●Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence
●Installing print drivers by using Add Printer
●Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
●Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003
●Setting a default printer
NOTE If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the
corresponding 64-bit print driver. For instructions, see Installing print drivers by using Add Printer.
ENWW Introduction 267
Installation in Windows
Font support
The following sections list the fonts that are included with Microsoft Windows software, and the fonts
that are available on the CD that came with the product.
Basic fonts
Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing product:
●Arial
●Courier New Italic
●Times New Roman Italic
●Arial Italic
●Courier New Bold
●Times New Roman Bold
●Arial Bold
●Courier New Bold Italic
●Times New Roman Bold Italic
●Arial Bold Italic
●Symbol
●Wingdings
●Courier New
●Times New Roman
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a Full Installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3800
printing-system software.
Table 5-1 Default fonts
Font name Font style File name
Albertus Extra Bold Regular ALBR85W.TTF
Albertus Medium Regular ALBR55W.TTF
Antique Olive Regular OLVR55W.TTF
Antique Olive Bold OLVR75W.TTF
Antique Olive Italic OLVR56W.TTF
CG Omega Regular CGOR45W.TTF
CG Omega Bold CGOR65W.TTF
268 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Font name Font style File name
CG Omega Bold Italic CGOR66W.TTF
CG Omega Italic CGOR46W.TTF
CG Times Regular CGTR45W.TTF
CG Times Bold CGTR65W.TTF
CG Times Bold Italic CGTR66W.TTF
CG Times Italic CGTR46W.TTF
Clarendon Condensed Bold CLAR67W.TTF
Coronet Regular CORONET.TTF
CourierPS Regular CPSR45W.TTF
CourierPS Bold CPSR65W.TTF
CourierPS Bold Oblique CPSR66W.TTF
CourierPS Oblique CPSR46W.TTF
Garamond Antiqua GARR45W.TTF
Garamond Halbfett GARR65W.TTF
Garamond Kursiv GARR46W.TTF
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett GARR66W.TTF
Helvetica® Regular HELR45W.TTF
Helvetica Bold HELR65W.TTF
Helvetica Bold Oblique HELR66W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Regular HELR47W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Bold HELR67W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique HELR68W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow Oblique HELR48W.TTF
Helvetica Oblique HELR46W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book AVGR45W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique AVGR46W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Regular AVGR65W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique AVGR66W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light Regular BOKR35W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light Italic BOKR36W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi Regular BOKR75W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi Italic BOKR76W.TTF
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CHANC___.TTF
ITC Zapf Dingbats Regular DINGS___.TTF
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
ENWW Font support 269
Installation in Windows
Font name Font style File name
Letter Gothic Regular LETR45W.TTF
Letter Gothic Bold LETR65W.TTF
Letter Gothic Italic LETR46W.TTF
Marigold Regular MARIGOLD.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Bold NCSR75W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic NCSR76W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Italic NCSR56W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook Roman NCSR55W.TTF
Palatino Bold PALR65W.TTF
Palatino Bold Italic PALR66W.TTF
Palatino Italic PALR46W.TTF
Palatino Roman PALR45W.TTF
SymbolPS Regular SYMPS__.TTF
Times* Bold TIMR65W.TTF
Times Bold Italic TIMR66W.TTF
Times Italic TIMR46W.TTF
Times Roman TIMR45W.TTF
Univers Bold UNVR65W.TTF
Univers Bold Italic UNVR66W.TTF
Univers Condensed Bold UNVR67W.TTF
Univers Condensed Bold Italic UNVR68W.TTF
Univers Condensed Medium UNVR57W.TTF
Univers Condensed Medium Italic UNVR58W.TTF
Univers Medium UNVR55W.TTF
Univers Medium Italic UNVR56W.TTF
Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD.
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts
Font name Font style File name
Albertus MT Regular PS_12639.TTF
Albertus MT Italic PS_12640.TTF
Albertus MT Lt Regular PS_14530.TTF
Antique Olive CompactPS Regular PS_11120.TTF
Table 5-1 Default fonts (continued)
270 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Font name Font style File name
Antique Olive Roman Regular PS_11119.TTF
Antique Olive Roman Bold PS_11118.TTF
Antique Olive Roman Italic PS_11846.TTF
Apple Chancery Italic PS_24516.TTF
Bodoni Poster Regular PS_12704.TTF
Bodoni PosterCompressed Regular PS_14508.TTF
BodoniPS Regular PS_12581.TTF
BodoniPS Bold PS_12585.TTF
BodoniPS Bold Italic PS_12586.TTF
BodoniPS Italic PS_12582.TTF
Candid Regular PS_24517.TTF
Chicago Regular PS_24518.TTF
Clarendon Light Regular PS_14513.TTF
ClarendonPS Regular PS_10269.TTF
ClarendonPS Bold PS_12968.TTF
Cooper Black Regular PS_10369.TTF
Cooper Black Italic PS_10370.TTF
Copperplate32bc Regular PS_14514.TTF
Copperplate33bc Regular PS_14515.TTF
CoronetPS Italic PS_10249.TTF
Eurostile Regular PS_10267.TTF
Eurostile Bold Regular PS_10268.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo Bold PS_14512.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo Regular PS_14511.TTF
Geneva Regular PS_24509.TTF
GillSans Regular PS_13872.TTF
GillSans Bold PS_13874.TTF
GillSans Bold Italic PS_13875.TTF
GillSans Condensed Regular PS_14053.TTF
GillSans Condensed Bold PS_14054.TTF
GillSans ExtraBold Regular PS_14051.TTF
GillSans Italic PS_13873.TTF
GillSans Light Italic PS_13871.TTF
GillSans Light Regular PS_13870.TTF
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
ENWW Font support 271
Installation in Windows
Font name Font style File name
Goudy Bold PS_12544.TTF
Goudy Bold Italic PS_10695.TTF
Goudy Regular PS_12542.TTF
Goudy ExtraBold Regular PS_12545.TTF
Goudy Italic PS_12543.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Regular PS_14526.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Bold PS_14528.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic PS_14529.TTF
Helvetica Condensed Italic PS_14527.TTF
Hoefler Text Regular PS_24519.TTF
Hoefler Text Black Regular PS_24521.TTF
Hoefler Text Black Italic PS_24522.TTF
Hoefler Text Italic PS_24520.TTF
Hoefler Text Ornaments Regular PS_24523.TTF
Joanna MT Regular PS_14503.TTF
Joanna MT Bold PS_14505.TTF
Joanna MT Bold Italic PS_14506.TTF
Joanna MT Italic PS_14504.TTF
Letter Gothic Italic PS_13778.TTF
Letter GothicPS Regular PS_13777.TTF
Letter GothicPS Bold PS_13779.TTF
Letter GothicPS Bold Italic PS_13780.TTF
Lubalin Graph Regular PS_12675.TTF
Lubalin Graph Bold PS_12677.TTF
Lubalin Graph Bold Italic PS_12625.TTF
Lubalin Graph Italic PS_12623.TTF
MarigoldPS Regular PS_94073.TTF
Mona Lisa Recut Regular PS_14525.TTF
Monaco Regular PS_24524.TTF
New York Regular PS_24510.TTF
Optima Regular PS_12506.TTF
Optima Bold PS_12510.TTF
Optima Bold Italic PS_12511.TTF
Optima Italic PS_12507.TTF
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
272 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Font name Font style File name
Oxford Italic PS_14072.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Italic PS_11546.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Regular PS_11545.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Bold PS_11547.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic PS_11548.TTF
Taffy Regular PS_14507.TTF
Univers 45 Light Regular PS_13501.TTF
Univers 45 Light Bold PS_14023.TTF
Univers 45 Light Bold Italic PS_14024.TTF
Univers 45 Light Italic PS_13502.TTF
Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold PS_14030.TTF
Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold Italic PS_14040.TTF
Univers 55 Regular PS_14021.TTF
Univers 55 Italic PS_14022.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed Regular PS_14029.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed Italic PS_14039.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Bold PS_13548.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Regular PS_13547.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic PS_14481.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS Italic PS_14480.TTF
Table 5-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
ENWW Font support 273
Installation in Windows
Installation instructions
The following sections provide instructions for installing the print drivers on various Windows operating
systems.
General installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, and XP operating
systems
Installation is similar for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating
systems. The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
NOTE The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and the
PS Emulation Driver are available on the printing-system software CD. For more information, see
the Installing print drivers by using Add Printer section in this chapter.
If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system
software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP
LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication
and some driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems.
For Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the
software.
When the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always
added to the system.
Installing from the printing-system CD
Follow these instructions to install the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing system from the CD that came
with the product.
1. Quit all software programs.
2. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to
and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.
3. Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printing-
system files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the
printing-system software file.
1. Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3. Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the product is installed. For detailed
installation instructions, see Detailed Windows installation.
274 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Detailed Windows installation
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can choose
to install the software by using either a Basic, Full, or Custom Installation.
Using the Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons
Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions for and explanations about
the installation process.
Click the Back button on any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box. The specific
dialog box depends on your previous selections.
After you select any options on a given screen, click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the
installation sequence.
To exit the installation sequence without installing the product, click the Cancel button in any installation
dialog box.
1. When you click Cancel, a dialog box opens that prompts you with this question: “Are you sure you
want to cancel the installation?”
Figure 5-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box
2. When you click Yes, the Cancel dialog box opens, stating that the setup was interrupted.
Figure 5-2 Cancel dialog box
3. Click Finish to close the installation screens.
ENWW Installation instructions 275
Installation in Windows
The result of clicking these buttons is explained in context in the following sections.
Modifying a pre-existing installation
If an HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer has been installed previously on your system, the appearance of
the main install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install-printer setting changes to modify
installation. A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are
presented, depending on the selections you make.
Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port
The printing-system software should be installed before the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer is
connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation
process, the software will prompt you to connect the device during installation.
Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence
NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this chapter appear in the Windows XP Professional
installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating
systems.
The Full Installation includes the following components:
●HP Color LaserJet 3800 PCL 6 Driver
●HP Easy Printer Care
●Screen Fonts
●Install Notes
●User Guide
When you select the Install Printer option from the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software
CD, the Language Selection dialog box appears.
Figure 5-3 Language Selection dialog box
NOTE The Language Selection dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD.
276 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
The installer automatically detects the language that the computer system uses and presents this
selection as the default.
You can select another language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the drop-
down menu.
Click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Welcome dialog box appears.
Figure 5-4 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Setup Wizard dialog box
NOTE The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800
printer. If you try to install the printer in a Windows NT 4.0 environment, the following screen
appears.
Figure 5-5 Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System
ENWW Installation instructions 277
Installation in Windows
When installing the product on a supported operating system, click Next on the Welcome screen to
continue the installation. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5-6 Software License Agreement dialog box
The I disagree option is selected by default. Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and
then click Next to proceed with the installation.
The Printer Connection dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-7 Printer Connection dialog box
278 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer does not support infrared connections.
If you click USB Cable (a "direct connection" using a USB 2.0 cable), and then click Next, the
Installation Type dialog box opens. This is the default option.
If you click Parallel Cable (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable), and then click Next, the
Installation Type dialog box opens.
To continue with the default installation sequence, see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box.
NOTE The printing-system software should be installed before the HP Color LaserJet 3800
printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During
the installation process, the software will prompt you to connect the device during installation.
If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer over the network, click Wired Networking in the
Printer Connection dialog box.
For a network installation, the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer must be connected to the network and
turned on before the printing-system software is installed so that the software can detect the printer.
NOTE For wireless installation instructions using an HP Jetdirect ew2400 802.11g Wireless
Print Server or an HP Direct 380x802.11B wireless print server, consult the documentation that
comes with the print server.
Click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box
ENWW Installation instructions 279
Installation in Windows
NOTE If you are installing the product over a network, you must let the search for the first subnet
in the network finish in order to find all available printers. After the first subnet is scanned for
available HP Color LaserJet 3800 printers, the results appear in the Printers Found dialog box.
However, the installer continues to search the network for additional printers after the first results
appear. The results of searching the first subnet usually takes place within about 20 seconds. It
might take some time for the installer to search the other subnets and for the full list of printers
to appear in the Printers Found dialog box (see Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box),
depending on the configuration of the network.
NOTE The installation process includes the option of using the TCP/IP address for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, which might be preferable to waiting for the installer to finish the
search.
If the network has a firewall that is blocking the installation, the Firewall Detected dialog box appears,
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-9 Firewall Detected dialog box
If you are performing a network installation and no printer is found, the Printer Not Found dialog box
appears, as shown in the following figure.
280 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-10 Printer Not Found dialog box
The product might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the printer is connected and is turned
on. If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a port through the firewall,
click Next.
The Searching dialog box appears (see Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box).
If a printer is found, the Printers Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that have
been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.
ENWW Installation instructions 281
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box
Select the printer that you want to install and click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box
opens (see Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box).
If the printer is that you want to install is not listed and you want the installer to continue searching
network subnet masks, click Search Again…. The Check Printer Connection screen appears.
Click Next to perform another search.
If the printer that you want to install is not listed and you know its TCP/IP address, click Next. The
Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens. See Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box
and follow the instructions for changing the TCP/IP address.
If a single printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching products that
have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.
282 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-12 Printer Found dialog box
If you click No, I want to install a different printer and then click Next, the Check Printer
Connection dialog box opens, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving
you the option of searching again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address (see Figure
5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box).
If you click Yes, install this printer and then click Next, the Confirm Network Settings dialog box
opens, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box
ENWW Installation instructions 283
Installation in Windows
In the Confirm Network Settings dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Installation
Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box).
If you click Change Settings…, the Confirm Change Setting dialog box opens, as shown in the
following figure.
WARNING! When you change the TCP/IP configuration by using the Change Settings button,
you change the actual settings in the product Jetdirect card. You should make changes to these
settings only with the advice of your network administrator.
Figure 5-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box
If you click No, the Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box).
If you click Yes, the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP
Settings dialog box).
The Check Printer Connection dialog box, which appears if you selectedNo, I want to install a
different printer in the Printer Found dialog box or if the system failed to detect the product over the
network, is shown in the following figure.
284 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box
If you click Search again for all available printers and then click Next, the Searching dialog box opens
(see Figure 5-8 Searching dialog box).
If you click Specify Printer by address and then click Next, the Specify Printer dialog box opens. The
Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure.
If you click Enter settings for a printer not on the network and then click Next, the Printer
Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box).
Figure 5-16 Specify Printer dialog box
ENWW Installation instructions 285
Installation in Windows
You can specify a printer by clicking one of the following options and typing in the required information:
●Hardware Address (MAC)
●IP Address
●IP Hostname
When you click Next, the Searching dialog box opens. When the search is finished, the Printer
Found dialog box opens (see Figure 5-11 Printers Found dialog box).
If you clicked Enter settings for a printer not on the network in the Check Printer Connection dialog
box and then clicked Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-17 Printer Settings dialog box
To install the printer by using the hardware address, click Hardware Address (MAC), type the product
hardware address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog
box opens, as shown in the following figure.
To install the printer using the TCP/IP address, click IP Address, type the product TCP/IP address in
the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown
in the following figure.
286 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box
Type a port name in the Port Name: field and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box (see
Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box).
Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 5-20
Installation Type dialog box).
NOTE If you selected Yes in the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box (see Figure 5-14
Confirm Changing Setting dialog box), the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens, as shown
in the following figure.
ENWW Installation instructions 287
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-19 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box
If you make a change in the IP Address:, Subnet Mask:, or Gateway: fields (without clicking Next)
and then click Suggest Settings…, the fields refresh with information that was found by the installer
and reported in the Printer Found screen.
Type a different TCP/IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Gateway address and then click Next to open the
Confirm Network Settings dialog box (see Figure 5-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box).
If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next, the Set Port Name dialog box opens
(see Figure 5-18 Set Port Name dialog box).
Figure 5-20 Installation Type dialog box
288 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
NOTE The components of a Full Installation might vary from product to product.
Click Basic Installation to install only the HP PCL 6 Unidriver (Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003) or the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver (Windows 98 and Windows Me) screen
fonts. If you click Basic Installation and then click Next, the Ready to Install dialog box opens (see
Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box).
If you select Custom Installation and then click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5-21 Drivers dialog box
An empty check box indicates that the feature is not installed. A check mark appears when you select
an install state for that feature.
Information about the space required and the space available on your hard drive appears in the dialog
box.
Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection.
It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the
drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you are not installing a driver).
Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Additional Software dialog box opens.
To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears.
ENWW Installation instructions 289
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-22 Driver Details dialog box
All the drivers that are available in the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click
OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.
In the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box
appears.
Figure 5-23 Additional Software dialog box
290 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box
appears.
Figure 5-24 Additional software Details dialog box
All the software that is available in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog
box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.
Click Next to open the Ready to Install dialog box.
ENWW Installation instructions 291
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-25 Ready to Install dialog box
Click Install to start the installation process.
Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs:
●General
●Sharing
Figure 5-26 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab
On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field.
292 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.
If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer
as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box.
Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over
a network.
Figure 5-27 Printer Properties Sharing tab
On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click the Shared as: option
and type the printer name in the text field.
NOTE When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share
the printer on Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by
clicking Shared as, you must type a name. You can also provide additional print driver support
for other operating systems.
If you click Shared as in the Sharing tab of the Printer Properties dialog box, the text box becomes
available. Type the share name and then click Next. The Ready to Install dialog box opens.
NOTE To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7
characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single page-
description language (PDL), or 72 charaters for multiple PDLs.
If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional
Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.
If you are installing the printer in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or a Windows Server 2003 operating
environment and you want to install additional drivers for Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Additional
Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.
ENWW Installation instructions 293
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-28 Additional Drivers dialog box
NOTE If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you
are using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK.
The Additional Drivers dialog box does not appear if the computer is running Windows 98 or
Windows Me.
In the Ready to Install dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printing-
system software folders and files. The Installing HP Color LaserJet 3800 dialog box is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5-29 Installing dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.
Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software.
At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.
294 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-30 Finish dialog box
Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be
presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box appears.
Figure 5-31 HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box
NOTE If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 over a direct connection and HP Easy
Printer Care was not installed earlier, an option for installing HP Easy Printer Care appears on
the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Next Steps dialog box.
ENWW Installation instructions 295
Installation in Windows
To verify that the printer is connected, click Print Driver Test Page. The Test Page dialog box appears.
Figure 5-32 Test Page dialog box
If the test page prints correctly, click OK to continue. If it does not print, click Troubleshoot… to open
screens that guide you through options to find the source of the problem.
If you have access to the Internet, you can register your product online. In the Congratulations dialog
box, click Register Product to open the HP Registration Web site.
296 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-33 HP Registration screen
Installing print drivers by using Add Printer
Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the Add Printer feature of Windows:
1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Go to the Add a printer feature in Windows.
In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. The
Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen
appears.
In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click
Printers, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
3. Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a
part of this process.
ENWW Installation instructions 297
Installation in Windows
If the computer is running a 64-bit Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit
print driver. The 64-bit print drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to
install a print driver by using the Add Printer feature.
1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers and Faxes, and then click Add a
printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears.
3. Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the product. The print drivers are loaded as a
part of this process.
4. Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the print-driver files on the software CD, as
shown in the following list:
●To install the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, select the following file:
\<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc90xmd.inf
●To install the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, select the following file:
\<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL5\hpc90xmd.inf
●To install the PS Emulation Unidriver, select the following file:
\<language>\Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpc90xmd.inf
5. Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process.
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard option to customize the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. To start the
utility, click installer customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser. Using this
option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any of the
following selections:
●Language
●Operating system
●Print drivers
●Components
NOTE For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device
Installer Customization Wizard, which is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj3800
Running the Installer Customization Wizard
The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be started from the CD browser, depending
on product-specific instantiation. It runs separately from the common Microsoft Installer (MSI) with its
own interface.
Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file
(RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple
systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be directly edited for
298 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
system-configuration differences. The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the
exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj3800
To run the Installer Customization Wizard
1. Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
2. In the CD browser main screen, click Installer Customization Wizard.
The Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard screen appears.
To complete the installation, follow the instructions in the dialog boxes, as described in the following
section.
Figure 5-34 Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard screen
Dialogs
Click Next in the Welcome to the HP Color LaserJet 3800 Installation Customization Wizard dialog
box. The Language Selection dialog box appears.
Figure 5-35 Language Selection dialog box
ENWW Installation instructions 299
Installation in Windows
Select the language and then click OK. The Software Licence Agreement dialog box appears.
Figure 5-36 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box
To cancel the installation, click Cancel on this or any other screen where it appears (see Using the Help,
Back, Next, and Cancel buttons).
Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and then click Next to open the Language dialog
box.
Figure 5-37 Language dialog box
300 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the product to the language that
is selected in the Language dialog box. Maintenance mode on systems where installation has
been completed by using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the
language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard
installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new product must be installed
in order to restore the option to install other languages.
The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the text
in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Language Selection dialog box earlier). The Language dialog
box defaults to the language that was selected in the Language Selection dialog box, but any language
that is available on the CD can be selected for the customized installer. The language selection is
recorded in the response file.
Click Next to open the Printer Port dialog box, as shown in the following figure.
Click Back on this or any screen where it appears to return to a previous screen.
Figure 5-38 Printer Port dialog box
Click Network Path to make the text field available for a queue name entry. If you click Network
Path and click the Browse, the Browse for Printer dialog box opens.
ENWW Installation instructions 301
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-39 Browse for Printer dialog box
Navigate to a printer and click OK to record the path in the Network Path field in the Printer Port dialog
box. Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box.
In the Printer Port dialog box, click Local (direct connect) port and then click Next to open the Printer
Connection dialog box. The Printer Connection dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless
of local support.
Figure 5-40 Printer Connection dialog box
Click the type of connection that you are using and then click Next to open the Drivers dialog box. See
Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box.
302 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
In the Printer Port dialog box, click New TCP/IP Port and then click Next to open the Specify TCP/IP
Port dialog box. The Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box includes all custom network ports that are available
on the local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be
created identically on the system where it will be used.
Figure 5-41 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box
Click IP Address to make the field available for typing the TCP/IP address for the printer. Only numerals
are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one digit in the IP Address field
to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP address.
Click IP Hostname to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. Any characters
are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If this option
is selected, you must type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message
from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP hostname.
Click Hardware Address to make the field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It
accepts any characters but limits the entry to 12 characters. If this option is selected, you must type at
least one character in the Hardware Address: field to prevent an error message from appearing and
prompting you for a valid hardware address.
After you select any the options, type the appropriate name or address, and then click Next, the
Drivers dialog box opens (see Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box).
For each of the options in the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box, you can either use the default port name
(as specified in each of the three options) or specify a different name.
If you click Use Default and click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens. See Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog
box.
To specify a different name, click Specify: and click Next to open the Port Creation Options dialog
box.
ENWW Installation instructions 303
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-42 Port Creation Options dialog box
Click No, do no create the port (the printer will not be installed) if you do not want to create a port.
Click Yes, create the port and click Next to open the Drivers dialog box.
If the printer cannot be found, type the printer hardware address in the Hardware Address field and
click Next.
NOTE To print a configuration page where the printer hardware address is listed, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
Figure 5-43 Drivers dialog box
304 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection.
It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the
drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you are not installing a driver).
To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears.
Figure 5-44 Driver Details dialog box
All the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click
OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.
On the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box
appears.
ENWW Installation instructions 305
Installation in Windows
Figure 5-45 Additional Software dialog box
To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box
appears.
Figure 5-46 Additional software Details dialog box
All the software that you selected in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details
dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.
306 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
In the Additional Software dialog box, click Next to open the Custom Installer Location dialog box,
which is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-47 Custom Installer Location dialog box
Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is large,
but is limited as to the number of characters that it can accommodate.
To change the physical location of the printer, click Browse…, navigate to the folder that you want, and
click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box.
Click Next to open the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-48 Ready to Create Installer dialog box
ENWW Installation instructions 307
Installation in Windows
NOTE The location for the installer package defaults to c:\<name of printer>.
NOTE During installation, several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the
directory that appears in the Location field. Be sure that enough space is available on the
directory before continuing.
Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs:
●General
●Sharing
Figure 5-49 Printer Properties General tab
On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name: field.
Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank.
If you want to use the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer
as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box.
Click OK to return to the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the
printer over a network.
The Sharing tab is shown in the following figure.
308 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
Figure 5-50 Printer Properties Sharing tab
On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click Shared as: and type
the printer name in the text field.
NOTE To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7
characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single page-
description language (PDL), or 72 charaters for multiple PDLs.
If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional
Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears.
Figure 5-51 Additional Drivers dialog box
If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you are using to
install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK.
ENWW Installation instructions 309
Installation in Windows
In the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing
the printing-system software folders and files. The Installing dialog box is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-52 Installing dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.
Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software.
At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked.
When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-53 Finish dialog box
Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.
310 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be
presented with some additional steps after you click Finish.
Distribution
The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD, except
that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected. The
installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method is useful
when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the
installation without being prompted.
You can perform the silent installation in two ways:
●Customized silent installer
●Command-line silent installer
The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The name
cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer package.
The end-user cannot customize the command-line silent installer. It installs the printing-system
components that are included in the Full Installation.
The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the
RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj3800
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP, and Server 2003
The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function
when you cannot see the product on the network.
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is
to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from
a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these
procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft.
Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a
function of the Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel X86 processor types.
To install the print driver on a Windows 2000,Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating system,
you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows 2000 print driver on the
Windows 2000 server, you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows 2000
Printer .INF file must contain the same product name as the Windows 98 or Windows Me printer .INF
file.
Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98 or
Windows Me PS Driver V4.0 or later.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers are running
in the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients
in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.
ENWW Installation instructions 311
Installation in Windows
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on
different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver
that is different from the one on the print server.
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with Windows 2000
and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode processes. User-
mode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal end-user processes
and software programs. A user-mode print driver that functions incorrectly can terminate (or “crash”)
only the process in which it is running—not the whole operating system. Because access to critical
system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased.
www.techweb.boi.hp.com
Setting a default printer
This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
1. In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000 operating systems, click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers.
In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Printers
and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP
Home).
2. Right-click the product that you want to set as the default printer.
3. Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.
312 Chapter 5 Installing Windows printing-system components ENWW
6 Installation for Macintosh operating
systems
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available
on the Web. For detailed information about operating systems that support printing-system software
installation for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, see Supported operating systems
This chapter provides procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-
system software for Macintosh operating systems. The chapter provides information about these topics:
●Macintosh component descriptions
●Installing the Macintosh printing system
●Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
●In-box disk layout
●Mac OS X Classic installation
●Mac OS X installation
ENWW Introduction 313
Installation in Macintosh
Macintosh component descriptions
The product includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
●PPDs for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5 and later
●PDEs for Mac OS X only (V10.1.5 and later)
HP LaserJet PPDs
In Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic), postscript printer definition (PPD) files for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 are installed to the Printer Descriptions folder, which is in the Extensions folder
within the System folder.
In Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/
Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.
The PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the product features and allow the computer
to communicate with the product. A print setup tool for the PPDs is provided on the printing-system
software CD. For information about the print setup tools in various Macintosh operating systems, see
Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems.
PDEs
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later only) that provide
access to product features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
HP Embedded Web Server
Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic) supports the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS). Use the
HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to perform
the following tasks:
●Name the product, assign it to a zone on the network, and change product settings.
●Set a password for the product.
●From the computer, lock out functions on the control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see
the printing-software help).
Install notes
This text file contains important information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-
system software, and technical assistance.
Online help
This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with
Mac OS 9.x HP products. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or
in the Macintosh OS Help Center.
314 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Screen fonts
The printing-system software for Macintosh operating systems no longer includes a font installer. The
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer uses previously installed system fonts when it is installed on a Macintosh
computer.
ENWW Macintosh component descriptions 315
Installation in Macintosh
Installing the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh computer, the installation procedures are basically the same for a network administrator,
a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the
printer.
NOTE If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk
connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct
connection to communicate with the product. You must set up the HP Color LaserJet 3800,
connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is installed. Macintosh
operating systems do not support parallel connections.
The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate language
for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that language.
NOTE Detailed installation steps can be found in Mac OS X Classic installation or Mac OS X
installation.
Installing the HP LaserJet printing-system software for the
Macintosh OS
1. Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp color LaserJet
3800 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.
2. Double-click the icon for your OS. For instance, if you are installing the printer in any version of
Mac OS X, double-click the Mac OS X icon. If you are installing the printer in Mac Classic or any
version of Mac OS 9, click the Mac OS 9 icon.
NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the "admin" password in the
Authenticate dialog box (Mac OS X, V10.1.5 and later only).
3. The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to
complete the software installation.
NOTE If you are installing the printing-system software on a Macintosh OS X system, be
patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During
this time the installer might appear to be stalled.
4. When software installation is complete, click Quit. Select one of the following options to finish
setting up the product:
●Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X Classic).
●Set up a printer with Mac OS X.
The software program that you use to finish setting up the printer varies by operating system. The
following table shows the print setup tools that are available.
316 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems
Operating System HP LaserJet Utility LaserWriter 8 Print Center Printer Setup Utility
Mac OS 9 V9.2.2
(Mac OS X Classic)
x x
Mac OS X V10.1.5 x
Mac OS X V10.2.8 x
Mac OS X V10.3.9 x
Mac OS X V10.4.1 x x
Setting up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9. V9.2.2
(Mac OS X Classic)
1. Open the Chooser from within the Apple Menu.
2. Click the appropriate print setup tool (see Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating
systems) on the left side of the Chooser dialog box.
3. Click the appropriate Zone to select it, if required.
4. Click your product name from the list that appears on the right side of the Chooser dialog box, and
then click Create. For the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer, the selection is HP Color LaserJet
470014.
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 317
Installation in Macintosh
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4
1. In the Applications folder, open the Utilities Folder, and then run the Printer Browser or the Printer
Setup Utility, depending on the version of the Macintosh operating system.
Figure 6-1 Printer Browser screen
318 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
2. Select the product and click Add. The Installable Options screen appears.
Figure 6-2 Installable Options screen
3. If the product has the optional 500-sheet tray 3, select Installed in the Tray 3 drop-down menu.
4. In the Memory Configuration: drop-down menu, select the amount of memory that is installed in
the product:
●64 MB RAM
●96 MB RAM
●128 MB RAM
●160 MB RAM
●192 MB RAM
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 319
Installation in Macintosh
●256 MB RAM
●288 MB RAM
●320 MB RAM
●384 MB RAM
●512 MB RAM
5. If the product has a duplex unit (a standard feature on the HP Color LaserJet 3800dn and the
HP Color LaserJet 3800dtn models), select the Duplex Unit check box.
6. In the Printer Disk: drop-down menu, select the appropriate option:
●None
●RAM Disk
●Hard Disk (A hard disk is an optional feature for all HP Color LaserJet 3800 models.)
7. In the Paper Matching: drop-down menu, select one of the following options:
●Prompt User for correct size
●Nearest Size & Scale
●Nearest Size & Crop
8. After you have selected the settings in the Installable Options screen, click Continue. The Printer
Browser screen shows the following tabs:
●Default Browser
●IP Printer
320 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Figure 6-3 Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab
9. In the Name: field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
10. In the Location: field, type the product location.
11. In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options:
●Auto Select (This is the default setting.)
●Generic PostScript Printer
●Other (Select the appropriate brand name.)
12. Click Add to save the settings.
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 321
Installation in Macintosh
13. If you want to search for additional printers, click More Printers. The Printer Browser search
dialog box opens.
Figure 6-4 More Printers screen
14. Use the drop-down menus to change the search settings. Select the printer that you want to install
and click Add.
To cancel the search, click Cancel.
322 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
15. To connect the printer through its TCP/IP address, click the IP Printer tab.
Figure 6-5 IP Printer tab
16. In the Search field in the upper-right corner, select one of the following options:
●All (this is the default setting)
●AppleTalk
●Bonjour
●FireWire®
●Open Directory
●Shared
●USB
17. In the Protocol: drop-down menu, select one of the following options:
●Internet Printing Protocol – IPP
●Line Printer Daemon – LPD
●HP Jet Direct – Socket
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 323
Installation in Macintosh
18. If you know the host name or TCP/IP address of the product, type it in the Address: field. (It might
also be available on the drop-down menu.)
19. If you know the queue path of the printer, type it in the Queue: field.
20. In the Name: field, type a name for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
21. In the Location: field, type the product location.
22. In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options:
●Auto Select (This is the default setting.)
●Generic PostScript Printer
●Other (Select the appropriate brand name.)
23. Click Add to save the settings. The product name appears in the Printer List.
Figure 6-6 Printer List screen
324 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
24. Click the product name to open the Select Printer screen and verify that the product has been
installed.
Figure 6-7 Select Printer screen
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3
1. In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility.
2. Click Add Printer (in Mac OS X V10.1), or click Add (Mac OS X V10.2), or click Printers and then
click Add Printer (Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later).
3. When the New Printer drivers detected pop-up box appears, click OK.
4. From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for the product.
5. Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for the product. For
example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select the product zone; or if you are using IP
Printing, type a TCP/IP address in the Printer Address field. In the Printer Model drop-down
menu, select HP. In the Model Name drop-down menu, select HP Color LaserJet 3800.
NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a .PPD file, click
the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then select the .PPD file that you want to
add.
6. Click Add. The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer appears in the Printer List.
7. To configure installable options in Mac OS X V10.2 and later, such as a duplexing unit or optional
paper trays, click Show Info? and select Installable Options in the drop-down menu.
NOTE This step is necessary only for network connections and USB connections that use
Rendezvous/Bonjour. AppleTalk automatically configures the installable options.
8. Configure the options, click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog box.
ENWW Installing the Macintosh printing system 325
Installation in Macintosh
Setting up an IP/LPR networked Printer with Mac OS 9.x
1. Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.
2. Click Printer (LPR), and then click OK.
3. Click Change in the LPR Printer Selection area.
4. Click the appropriate TCP/IP address and queue, and then click OK.
5. Click Change and scroll through the list of products.
6. Click the correct product, and then click Select.
7. Click Create.
326 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash.
ENWW Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system 327
Installation in Macintosh
In-box disk layout
The Macintosh printing-system software consists of the following folders: the HP LaserJet Installer-
Integrated installer program for Mac OS X and for Mac OS 9, and a PDF folder for manuals. The folders
are named as follows:
●Mac OS X
( the HP LaserJet Installer)
●Mac OS 9 (the integrated installer program for Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later and for Mac OS 9 V9.2.2)
●PDF (manuals)
328 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Mac OS X Classic installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS X
Classic.
Main Install dialog-box sequence
This section provides information about the installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy Install (the
typical installation option) in Macintosh operating environments.
A Custom Installation is not available in Mac OS 9 for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
1. Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon
on the desktop to open the installer folder.
The hp LaserJet for Macintosh dialog box opens.
2. Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Installer dialog box.
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default "Macintosh HD," click Install
Location: to specify a location.
3. Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to
stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the installation file-copy process.
The Installation was successful dialog box appears.
4. If you want to perform additional installations, click Continue in the Installation was successful
dialog box to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
If you want to set up the printer, click Quit on the Installation was successful dialog box.
The Mac OS 9 readme opens. Follow the instructions to continue setting up the printer.
ENWW Mac OS X Classic installation 329
Installation in Macintosh
Mac OS X installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog-box sequences for the Mac OS X
operating system.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy
Install (the typical installation option).
Insert the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, double-click
the hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder.
Figure 6-8 hp LaserJet 3800 CD-ROM icon
The hp LaserJet Software dialog box opens.
Figure 6-9 hp LaserJet Software screen
In the hp LaserJet Software pane, double-click the Mac OS X folder to open it.
In the Mac OS X folder, double-click the HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon. This begins the install
process.
330 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
Figure 6-10 HP Color LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon
If you are installing the product on Mac OS X V10.1 or later, the Authenticate dialog box appears.
Figure 6-11 Authenticate dialog box
Type the correct “admin” password and click OK to continue. The installer startup screen appears.
Click Cancel to exit the installation.
Figure 6-12 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup-screen dialog box
Click Continue. The License dialog box appears.
ENWW Mac OS X installation 331
Installation in Macintosh
Figure 6-13 License dialog box
Click Print… to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the license
agreement.
Click Save As… to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk.
Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer.
Read the software-license agreement and then click Accept to continue the installation. The Easy
Install dialog box appears.
Figure 6-14 Easy Install dialog box
332 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
The default option in the drop-down menu at the top of the screen is Easy Install. You can also select
Custom Install in the same menu.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Figure 6-15 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
Click Select All to install all of the options that are available on the printing-system software CD, or use
the check boxes on the list to install the components that you want to install.
Click the I icon to the right of each item in the list to open a pop-up screen that describes the component.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. The files are installed in the Library folder on
the Macintosh CD.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Figure 6-16 Installing dialog box
The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the
installation.
Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
When installation is complete, the LASERJET README.RTF file opens and the LaserJet
ReadMe.rtf icon appears on the desktop. Follow these instructions to set up a printer queue for your
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
ENWW Mac OS X installation 333
Installation in Macintosh
Figure 6-17 LaserJet ReadMe icon
A pop-up message stating that the installation was successful also appears.
Figure 6-18 Installation success message
Click Quit to exit the installer.
Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer.
334 Chapter 6 Installation for Macintosh operating systems ENWW
7 Engineering Details
Introduction
This chapter presents engineering detail for the following topics:
●File to E-mail utility
●HP Easy Printer Care
●Media attributes
●Remote firmware update
●Printing print-ready documents
●Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
ENWW Introduction 335
Engineering Details
File to E-mail utility
The File to E-mail utility is a standalone Microsoft Foundation Class (MFC) program that reads an .INI
file to detect where the HP LaserJet product software is installed. The program then attaches relevant
log or history files to an e-mail that can be sent to HP Customer Support to assist troubleshooting. The
utility runs on the computer, but does not interact with your HP LaserJet product.
The tool is included on the installer CD, but is not copied to the computer during the software installation.
HP Customer Support can also send the utility to you through e-mail or by posting it to an HP web page.
The tool is compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
The File to E-mail utility runs with any MAPI-compliant e-mail programs. It does not run with Web-based
e-mail services such as Yahoo, Hotmail, or AOL.
Depending on the speed of the computer, it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log
files and attach them to an e-mail message.
The File to E-mail utility consists of two files that are located on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 software
CD:
●<CD-ROM drive>util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.exe
●<CD-ROM drive>util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.ini
To use the File to E-mail utility, copy these files to the desktop, navigate to them in Explorer, and then
double-click FileToEmail.exe to open the utility. The utility generates files, opens an e-mail message,
and attaches the files so that you can send them to an IT administrator, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE The figure is provided as an example only. The actual files attached will vary, depending
on your product.
336 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Figure 7-1 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached
If the File to E-mail utility fails for any reason (for instance, if you cancel the new message), all the files
are copied to a folder on the desktop that is named CCC, possibly with strings of 0's attached to the
end. You can zip these files and e-mail them separately.
ENWW File to E-mail utility 337
Engineering Details
HP Easy Printer Care
This section contains information about the following topics:
●Availability
●Uninstall options
●HP Software Update
Availability
Uninstall options
After a printing-system installation, click the uninstall icon in the HP Color LaserJet 3800 program group
to select and remove any or all of the HP printing-system components. Follow these instructions to
remove the HP Easy Printer Care and HP Device Communications Services in a Windows XP operating
environment.
NOTE To uninstall the HP Easy Printer Care software only, use the Windows Add/Remove
Programs feature.
1. Click Start.
2. Select Hewlett-Packard.
3. Select HP Easy Printer Care.
4. Click Uninstall and follow the onscreen instructions.
Whether you uninstall HP Easy Printer Care from the Program menu or by using the Windows Add/
Remove feature, the installer informs you if HP Easy Printer Care is still managing any products. At this
point, the following options are available:
●Cancel
●Uninstall
●Continue
If you select Continue, then HP Easy Printer Care is uninstalled. The installer then checks to see if the
Printer Usage Reports plug-in (PUR) is present and removes it. The uninstall process then removes
HP Device Communications Services, if HP Device Communications Services is not supporting
programs or products other than HP Easy Printer Care. If HP Device Communications Services is
supporting other applications, then its Add/Remove Program entries appear in the Add/Remove
Program list. HP Software Update is not uninstalled.
HP Software Update
HP Software Update, a utility which can check the HP Web site for updates to your HP software, is
installed together with HP Easy Printer Care if the system has an older version or does not carry it.
To uninstall HP Software Update, use the Windows Add/Remove Programs feature.
338 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Media attributes
This section includes the following information about media attributes:
●Media sources and destinations
●Media-source commands
●Driver-supported media sizes
●Driver-supported media types
●Custom paper sizes
●Media-type commands
Media sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the
HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
Table 7-1 HP Color LaserJet 3800 media sources and destinations
Media sources 100-sheet multipurpose tray (tray 1) Standard
250-sheet paper tray (tray 2) Standard
500-sheet paper tray (tray 3) Optional; standard on the HP Color
LaserJet 3800dtn printer model
Media destinations Standard 250-sheet top bin Standard
Media-source commands
The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource. See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the
command for tray 2.
The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the
numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l1H is the command fortray 2.
Table 7-2 Media-source commands
Media source PCL 6
ubyte # MediaSource
or ubyte_array
"string"
MediaSource
1
PCL 5
Esc&l#H
PostScript
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true |
false or null
Manual feed in tray 1 2 2 3 true
Tray 1 (100-sheet) 3 4 3 false
Tray 2 (250-sheet) 4 1 0 false
ENWW Media attributes 339
Engineering Details
Media source PCL 6
ubyte # MediaSource
or ubyte_array
"string"
MediaSource
1
PCL 5
Esc&l#H
PostScript
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true |
false or null
Tray 3 (500-sheet) 5 5 1 false
Automatically Select (HP
unidrivers)
NA NA NA
Automatically Select (HP
traditional PCL drivers) or
Printer Auto Select (HP
unidrivers)
7 1 null false
1
For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2"
MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for tray 2.
Driver-supported media sizes
The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: drop-down
menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the product and operating system. The
list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes
Paper sizes
1
Width Height PCL 6
2
Letter 216 mm
(8.5 inches)
279 mm
(11.0 inches)
"LETTER"
Statement 215.9 mm
(8.5 inches)
139.7 mm
(5.5 inches)
"STATEMENT"
16K 197 mm
(7.75 inches)
273 mm
(10.75 inches)
"ROC16K"
8.5 x 13 216 mm
(8.5 inches)
330 mm
(13 inches)
"8.5x13"
A4 210 mm
(8.27 inches)
297 mm
(11.69 inches)
"A4"
A5 148 mm
(5.83 inches)
210 mm
(8.27 inches)
"A5"
B5 (JIS) 182 mm
(7.17 inches)
257 mm
(10.12 inches)
"JIS B5"
Double Postscard (JIS) 100 mm
(3.94 inches)
200 mm
(7.87 inches)
"JPOSTD"
Double Japan Postscard
Rotated
148 mm 200 mm
(7.87 inches)
“Double Postcard (JIS)”
Table 7-2 Media-source commands (continued)
340 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Paper sizes
1
Width Height PCL 6
2
(5.83 inches)
Envelope #10 105 mm
(4.13 inches)
241 mm
(9.5 inches)
"COM10"
Envelope B5 176 mm
(6.93 inches)
250 mm
(9.84 inches)
"B5 ENV"
Envelope C5 162 mm
(6.38 inches)
229 mm
(9.02 inches)
"C5"
Envelope DL 110 mm
(4.33 inches)
220 mm
(8.66 inches)
"DL"
Envelope Monarch 99 mm
(3.88 inches)
190 mm
(7.5 inches)
"MONARCH"
Executive 185 mm
(7.25 inches)
266 mm
(10.5 inches)
"EXEC"
Executive (JIS) 216 mm
(8.5 inches)
330 mm
(12.99 inches)
"JISEXEC"
Legal 216 mm
(8.5 inches)
355 mm
(14.0 inches)
"LEGAL"
Custom Minimum:
127 mm
(5.0 inches)
Maximum:
215.9 mm
(8.5 inches)
Minimum:
76.2 mm
(3.0 inches)
Maximum:
355.6 mm
(14.0 inches)
4
1
For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch.
2
The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."
4
For custom sizes, the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0 9.0
CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits."
Driver-supported media types
The following table shows the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3800 print-drivers support.
Table 7-4 Supported input media types
Media types
(command string)
Tray 1/top
bin/stacker
bin
Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500-
sheet)
Duplexing unit Manual duplexing
Unspecified YYYYY
Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes (continued)
ENWW Media attributes 341
Engineering Details
Media types
(command string)
Tray 1/top
bin/stacker
bin
Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500-
sheet)
Duplexing unit Manual duplexing
Plain Y Y Y Y Y
Preprinted Y Y Y Y Y
Letterhead Y Y Y Y Y
Transparency Y Y Y N N
Prepunched Y Y Y Y Y
Labels Y Y Y N N
Bond Y Y Y Y Y
Recycled Y Y Y Y Y
Color Y Y Y Y Y
Light (60–75 g/m
2
, or
16.4–20.5 lb)
Y Y Y Y Y
Intermediate (90–
104 g/m
2
, or 24.7–
28.5 lb)
Y Y Y Y Y
Heavy (105–120 g/m
2
,
or 28.8–32.9 lb)
Y Y Y Y Y
Extra Heavy (120–163
g/m
2
, or 32.9–44.7 lb)
Y Y N N Y
Cardstock (164–220 g/
m
2
, or 45–60.3 lb)
Y Y N N Y
Rough (90–105 g/m
2
,
or 24.7–28.8 lb)
Y Y Y Y Y
Glossy
1
(75–120 g/m
2
,
or 20.5–32.9 lb)
Y Y Y Y Y
Tough Paper
1
(Glossy
Film)
Y Y Y N Y
Envelope Y N N N N
1
Use only HP LaserJet glossy media. Using HP Inkjet glossy media can cause permanent damage to the printer.
Custom paper sizes
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer.
Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes
Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 (100-sheet
multipurpose)
Width 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) 215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Table 7-4 Supported input media types (continued)
342 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 3 (500-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Duplexing unit Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 355.6 mm (14.0 inches)
Media-type commands
The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of
characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters
plus 1, for a total of 6.
Table 7-6 Media-type commands
Esc& n# Wd Paper type
Esc& 6Wd Plain
Esc& 11 Wd Preprinted
Esc& 11 Wd Letterhead
Esc& 13 Wd Transparency
1
Esc& 11 Wd Prepunched
Esc& 7Wd Labels
Esc& 5Wd Bond
Esc& 9Wd Recycled
Esc& 6Wd Color
Esc& 6Wd Light
Esc& 13 Wd Intermediate
Esc& 6Wd Heavy
Esc& 12 Wd Extra Heavy
Esc& 11 Wd Cardstock
2
Esc& 6Wd Rough
Esc& 7Wd Glossy
Esc& 12 Wd Tough Paper
Esc& 9Wd Envelope
1
You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.
2
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an
uppercase "S".
Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued)
ENWW Media attributes 343
Engineering Details
Remote firmware update
The HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for
downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest
printing-system software and print drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:
1. Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the product.
2. Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to the computer.
3. Download the new firmware to the product.
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page,
follow these instructions.
1. Press (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press and to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press .
3. Press and to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4. Press to print the configuration page.
5. Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code. The
firmware date code looks something like this: 20051002 07.000.0.
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
The remote firmware update (.RFU) file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a self-
extracting .EXE file. For detailed instructions about how to download the .EXE file, go to the following
URL:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware
The .EXE file consists of a readme file and the .RFU file.
NOTE For UNIX systems, the remote firmware update file is a .TAR file.
Downloading the new firmware to the product
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/support/
clj3800.
The product can receive an RFU update to a product when the product is in a READY state. The product
waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.
NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access
memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to
default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the
defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets,
and Web-access alerts.
344 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the
product to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the
host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The reinitialization
time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the product, such as the number of EIO devices
installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed.
Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is
processed.
Use one of the methods described in this manual to update the printer firmware.
Printer messages during the firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update
Cause Result
The job was cancelled from the control panel. No update has occurred.
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example,
the parallel cable was removed).
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE
process.
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING
UPGRADE process.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel
port.
A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process. The update has been completed.
Print jobs that are sent to the product while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
All HP LaserJet products leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote
firmware update fails in a Windows OS, the .RFU file must be resent. For more information, see Table
7-9 Update messages.
If a remote firmware update fails in a Macintosh OS, contact support from an HP Customer Care Center.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective
action required for each situation.
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action
The .RFU file is corrupted. The product recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update. Download
the file again and send the new file to the product. Download the file from
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware.
The wrong product is contained in
the .RFU file.
The product recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download the
correct file and send it to the product. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/
clj3800_firmware.
ENWW Remote firmware update 345
Engineering Details
Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action
The upgrade was interrupted. See Table 7-9 Update messages.
A flash hardware failure occurred. Although it is extremely unlikely, the product might have a hardware failure. Call
technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the product
for a local telephone support list).
Three messages appear during a normal update process; a fourth (RESEND UPGRADE) appears only
if the update process does not succeed.
Table 7-9 Update messages
Printer message Explanation
RECEIVING UPGRADE This message appears from the time the product recognizes the beginning of
an .RFU update until the time the product has verified the validity and integrity of
the .RFU update.
NOTE If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the
firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the
control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. No message
appears on the product control panel to indicate that the update was
interrupted.
PERFORMING UPGRADE This message appears while the product is actually reprogramming the firmware.
NOTE If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while
PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the
update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears on
the control-panel display.
INITIALIZING This message appears from the time the product has finished reprogramming the
DIMM until the product reinitializes.
RESEND UPGRADE This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the
RFU process is interrupted. It can also occur if firmware for accessories (such as
the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted. Perform another update
by any means that is supported by the printer, regardless of the connection
(network, parallel, or USB).
RFU LOAD ERROR
SEND RFU UPGRADE
ON PARALLEL PORT
This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the
print-engine firmware is corrupted.
If this message appears, the update must now be sent only by a computer that is
attached to the parallel port of the product.
NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the
control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
Downloading custom color profiles
Obtain custom color profiles just as you would any other remote-firmware update, using the procedures
described in these sections.
Custom color-profile .RFU files are named as follows:
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure (continued)
346 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
clj####_<what>_<version>.RFU
where:
●#### is the printer-model number of the color table
●<what> is a one-word description of what the table does
●<version> is a two-part version number consisting of a major and a minor value
The custom color-profile .RFU tiles that are available include:
●A simulation of the color settings for the HP LaserJet 4650 printer:
*clj4650_*.RFU
●A simulation of the color settings for the HP LaserJet 9500 printer:
*clj9500_*.RFU
●A remote-firmware-update file that resets your printer to its original state:
*reset_*.RFU
While every care is taken to ensure a close match with the colors available on the product, several
factors can affect the outcome of the match:
●Differences between printers within and between a given model line
●Media type
●The age and state of the custom-profile printer and the product to which the profile is to be
downloaded
●The use or non-use of genuine HP supplies
●Environmental conditions
Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to update the printer firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP) through
a browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current
level of firmware
2. Open a browser window.
3. In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>, where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/
IP address of your product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP://
192.168.0.90
4. Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.
5. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon or onto any open space in the browser window.
ENWW Remote firmware update 347
Engineering Details
NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable
folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the
following procedure to enable the folder view.
a. Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.
b. Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.
c. Click OK to save the setting.
6. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
7. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network
connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to
update the firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.
Windows operating systems
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware
NOTE Before connecting to the product, make sure that the product is not in Powersave
mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2. Open a command window on the computer.
3. Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type ftp 192.168.0.90.
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6. When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7. Type bin at the command prompt.
8. Press Enter. The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the
command window.
348 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
9. Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded
from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\3800FW.RFU, and then press
Enter.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type the following path:
put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3800fw.rfu"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.
10. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
11. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface.
Macintosh operating systems
1. Make a note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current
level of firmware.
2. Open a Terminal window on the computer. You can find the Terminal program on the computer
hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder.
3. Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS> For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type FTP 192.168.0.90
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
ENWW Remote firmware update 349
Engineering Details
6. Type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the
Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/3800fw.rfu, and then
press Enter.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3800FW.RFU".
To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put command, type put and
a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete path
to the file is automatically placed after the put command.
7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
8. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port
If the product is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the
product by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. At the command
prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
product port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3800fw.rfu lpt1
350 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, typeC:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu"
lpt1
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
6. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
7. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or
in an MS-DOS window.
Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer drivers, but it is possible to update
the printer firmware in Windows NT 4.0.
1. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is the
name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer
port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3800fw.rfu lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu"
lpt1
2. Press Enter on the keyboard.
3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
5. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
ENWW Remote firmware update 351
Engineering Details
Remote firmware update through a USB port
If the product is connected over a USB connection, follow these instructions:
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME>\
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including
the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being
shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
copy /b 3800fw.rfu\\your_computer\clj3800
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu"
\\your_computer\clj3800
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the
computer screen.
3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update through a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions:
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including
the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being
shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3800fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800fw.rfu"
\\your_server\your_computer
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the
computer screen.
3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
352 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .TAR file to the product is acceptable,
including the following:
1. At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>, where
</home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .TAR file.
2. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
3. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility
Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the
HP Printer Utility and the 3800FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product. The HP Printer
Utility is a software program that is available only for Mac OS X V10.2 or later.
The HP Printer Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printing-system software CD-ROM
that came with the product. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP Printer Utility by
downloading the latest product installer from www.hp.com/go/clj3800_software.
The firmware file (3800FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware
See Downloading the new firmware to the product for more information.
After you have the firmware file and the HP Printer Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.
Complete the following steps:
1. Open the HP Printer Utility.
2. Select Update Firmware, click Choose, browse to firmware upgrade file, and then click Open.
3. On the Update Firmware screen, click Update.
ENWW Remote firmware update 353
Engineering Details
NOTE You might receive an error message on the screen indicating that the printer is
offline. Verify that the printer is turned on. If it is, ignore the message. The Updating screen
appears and the update proceeds as expected.
4. The update process can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with
the product or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
5. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update by using the HP LaserJet Utility
(Mac OS 9.x only)
Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the 3800FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the product.
The firmware file (3800FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/clj3800_firmware
See Downloading the new firmware to the product for more information.
After you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the update process.
Complete the following steps:
1. Open the HP LaserJet Utility.
2. Click Select Printer, select the product that you want to update on the network, and then click
OK. An information dialog box for the printer appears.
3. On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears where you can
select a file to be downloaded to the product.
4. Click Select File.
5. Locate the 3800FW.RFU file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Click
Select. The Files dialog boxes are updated to show the 3800FW.RFU file under File to download.
6. Click Download.
7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. A
progress bar in the HP LaserJet Utility shows how much of the file has been downloaded. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
354 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
8. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.
1. From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l
<FILENAME> -OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>, where <IPADDRESS> can
be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the product, and where <FILENAME> is the
filename of the .RFU file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update appear on the control panel.
3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
5. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on the computer. Complete the
following steps to update a single product through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file
from the HP Web site.
1. Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2. Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the product in the Quick Device Find field, and then
click Go. The product Status window opens.
3. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
ENWW Remote firmware update 355
Engineering Details
4. Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product that you want to update
in the list of products, and click to select it.
5. Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update
Printer Firmware from the choose action list.
6. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in
the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you
downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
7. Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.
8. Refresh the browser.
9. Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
10. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product.
11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the
control panel.
NOTE The product automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the product or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
12. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the
current update.
HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.
Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.
1. Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2. Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps:
a. Click Device Management, and then click All Devices.
-or-
b. Shift-click to select products that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK.
-or-
c. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.
3. To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.
4. The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if
necessary to view it.
5. In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type the appropriate information.
Click Return to Device Group when finished.
356 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Printing print-ready documents
Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program
that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original
application and printing it to a file, or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet
downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP Color LaserJet 3800
printer without first opening the original software program:
●HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PCL)
●Portable Document Format (.PDF)
●Postscript (.PS)
●Text (.TXT)
Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product.
NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents. However,
any print-ready file type can be substituted.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser.
NOTE The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
2. Open a browser window.
3. In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address
of your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following:
FTP:// 192.168.0.90
4. Locate the print-ready file for the product.
5. Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder
viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following
procedure to enable the folder view.
1. Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.
2. Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.
3. Click OK to save the setting.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 3800 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print
a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system:
ENWW Printing print-ready documents 357
Engineering Details
Windows operating systems
1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the Configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
2. Open a command window on the computer.
3. Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type the following:
ftp 192.168.0.90
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6. When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7. Type bin at the command prompt.
8. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
9. Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed,
including the path. For example, type the following:
put C:\LJ\3800FW.PDF
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3800FW.PDF"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
10. Press Enter on the keyboard.
11. The print-ready file prints.
12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface.
358 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Macintosh operating systems
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
2. Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer
hard drive in the following folder:
System/Applications/Utilities/Terminal
3. Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90,
type the following:
FTP 192.168.0.90
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6. You can drag and drop the firmware file into the Terminal folder (System/Applications/Utilities/
Terminal). Alternatively, you can type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the print-
ready file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type the following:
put /username/desktop/3800FW.PDF
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/3800FW.PDF"
To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put command, type
put and a space, and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The
complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command.
7. Press Enter.
8. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about
five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer.
9. The product automatically turns off and on again to activate the update.
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port
To print directly by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions in this section for your operating
system.
ENWW Printing print-ready documents 359
Engineering Details
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
Mode lpt1:,,p
NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the
correct LPT port number in the mode command.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\> command prompt, type the following:
copy /b c:\3800FW.PDF lpt1
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800FW.PDF"
4. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints.
5. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt
or in an MS-DOS window.
1. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3800FW.PDF lpt1
2. Press Enter on the keyboard.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\3800FW.PDF". The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the
job prints.
3. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
360 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps.
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file
(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is
being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\3800FW.PDF \\your_server\sharename
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\3800FW.PDF"
\\your_server\sharename
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable,
including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>,
where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
NOTE This direct printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
and Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.
1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Determining the current level of firmware.
2. From a command window, type the following:
lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps
<FILENAME>
where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where
FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file.
NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L",
not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
3. The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window.
4. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
ENWW Printing print-ready documents 361
Engineering Details
Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems
The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for operating
system that supports the HP Color LaserJet 3800 printer. The printing-system drivers for Windows 98
and Windows Me are the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and PS Emulation
Driver. The printing-system drivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are the
new HP unidrivers, with a user interface look and feel that is consistent across the HP PCL 6 Unidriver,
HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver.
For more information about the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers, see HP
traditional print drivers for Windows. For more information about the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and
PS emulation unidrivers, see HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for Windows.
NOTE HP Color LaserJet 3800 print driver features are supported in Windows XP (both 32-bit
and 64-bit) and Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit ) operating systems.
HP Color LaserJet 3800 print driver features are supported in Mac OS 9 V9.2.2 (Mac OS X
Classic) and Mac OS X V10.1.5 or later, except as otherwise noted.
Job-stream output
Table 7-10 Driver support for the job-stream output feature
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
PCL 5 support x x
PCL 6 support x x
PCL 6 pass-through support x x
PCL 6 XL Color x x
Postscript 3 x x
Postscript 1, 2 xx
PCL 6 raster compression
Table 7-11 PCL 6 color raster compression support
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
PCL 6 color raster compression x x
362 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
PJL/PJL Encoding
Table 7-12 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
PJL support x x x x x x
UTF-8 encoding for PJL
(Unicode to 8-bit)
xxx xxx
Job tracking
Table 7-13 Driver support for job tracking
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
.PRN file driver identification x x x x x x
Job accounting information x x x x x
Job accounting enhancements
(UUID)
x x x x x x (Mac OS X only)
Job accounting enhancements
(color)
x x x
Reliable Time Services – born on
date (PJL DMINFO)
x x x x x
Job Timestamp – born on date
(PJL TIMESTAMP)
x x x x x
Born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x x x x
Sending user name with every
job
x x x x x
Driver hooks for job ticket
consumption
x x x
Driver hooks for event
extensions for UI control data
xxx
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 363
Engineering Details
Connectivity/Printing
Table 7-14 Driver support for connectivity features
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Parallel (direct connect) x x x x x x
Network – TCP/IP (wired) x x x x x x x
Network – TCP/IP (wireless x x x x x x x
USB (Direct Connect) through
7.1.2 Port Monitor (MS USB
Print) (bidirectional)
x x x x x
USB (Direct Connect) through
1284.4 Port Monitor (HP DOT4 /
7.1.3 ) (bidirectional)
x x x x x
USB (Direct Connect) through
1284.4 Port Monitor (MS DOT4 /
7.1.3) (bidirectional) –
Windows XP only
x x x
USB (Direct Connect) through
7.1.2 (Apple USB Print)
(bidirectional)
x
USB (Direct Connect) through
1284.4 (HP Hose DOT4 / 7.1.3 )
(bidirectional)
x (Mac OS 9 only)
USB (Direct Connect) through
1284.4 (HP CIA DOT4 / 7.1.3 )
(bidirectional)
x (Mac OS X only)
Rendezvous x (Mac OS X only)
Bidirectional communication
Table 7-15 Driver support for the bidirectional communication features
Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Autoconfiguration through EAC x x x x x
Autoconfiguration through direct
connect – parallel - LPT - DOT4
stack
x x x x x
Network – TCP/IP x x x x x
364 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Automatic Configuration (other
than EAC)
x
Autoconfiguration through EAC
over USB (DOT4)
x x x x x
Update Now x x x x x
Language Monitor
1
x x
1
MasterMon is a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet products for the duplex communication channel with bidirectional
communication products. It inserts PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Table 7-16 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x
Feature lockout x x x x x
Continuous export x x x x x
Bundle support
Table 7-17 Bundle support
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Printer bundle in driver UI x x
Bundle support thorugh installer x x x x x
Table 7-15 Driver support for the bidirectional communication features (continued)
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 365
Engineering Details
Tray and paper assignment
Table 7-18 Tray and paper assignment
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98 and Windows Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Assign paper size to tray x x x x
Installable options
Table 7-19 Driver support for installable options
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Duplexing unit x x x x x x x
Manual duplex enable x x x x x x
Printer hard disk x x x x x x x
Total memory x x x x x x x
DWS (available memory) x x x
Additional source trays x x x x x x x
Font DIMM/compact flash
support
x x x x
Font DIMM Installer x
Mopier enabled x x x x x x x
Job-storage feature enabled x x x x x x x
Postscript passthrough x x
366 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Printer services
Table 7-20 Printer services (Services tab)
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Internet Services Links/Launch
product support Web site
x x x x
Launch HP EWS features
through TCP/IP port
xx x x
UI features
Table 7-21 Driver support for UI features
Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
UI tabs ("Panels" in Macintosh) x x x x x x x (Mac OS X only)
UI extensions x x x x
Page preview images x x x x x x
Printer image bitmaps with hot
spots
x x
Paper size dimensions x x x
Device settings notification x x x x x
About … x x x x x x
Accessibility/Disability (JAWS) x x x x x x (Mac OS X only)
Accessibility architecture x x x x x
Help features
Table 7-22 Driver support for Help features
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
What's this? Help (F1) x x x x x x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 367
Engineering Details
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Help button x x x x x
Bubble Help x x
MS Windows "?" Help x x x x x x
Constraint Help x x x x x x
Print Task Quick Sets
Table 7-23 Driver support for Print Task Quick Sets
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Print Task Quick Sets x x x x x
User Defined Quick Sets x x x x x x
Media sizes
Table 7-24 Driver support for media sizes
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Media Size selection x x x x x x x
User-defined custom media x x x x x x x
Custom media-size dialog
through driver UI
xxx xxx x
Table 7-22 Driver support for Help features (continued)
368 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Media types
Table 7-25 Driver support for media types
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Media types appear in one list x x x x x x x
User Defined Media Types x x x x x
Combined Media Types &
Sources in program. (Always
ON, NO driver UI switch)
x x x x
Combined Media Types and
sources in program (optional,
driver UI switch)
x x
Combined Media Types and
sources in program (in driver UI)
x x
Alternative Letterhead mode x x x x x
Job storage
Table 7-26 Driver support for the job-storage features
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Proof and hold x x x x x x x
Private job x x x x x x x
Quick Copy x x x x x x x
Stored Job x x x x x x x
Job name x x x x x x
User name x x x x x x x
PIN to print (for private jobs) x x x x x x x
PIN to print (for stored jobs) x x x x x x
Job-storage pop-up x x x x
Automatic job and user name x x x x x x
Job-storage override x x x x x x x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 369
Engineering Details
Print quality and resolution
Table 7-27 Print-quality and resolution features
Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Print-quality options x x x x x x x
Print-quality – custom options
recall
x x
Print optimizations x x
Rendering mode (automatic) x
Send graphics as vector x x
Send graphics as raster x x
Send page as raster x
Color REt
1
x x x x x x
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) x x
Image Mode x x x x x x x
HP Digital Photograph x
PCL 5 Immediate Graphics
Mode
x x
1
Activated through the Edge Control option
Reordering Options
Table 7-28 Driver support for the reordering options
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Page order (based on output bin) x x x x x x (Mac OS X only)
Page order (reordering for job) x x x x (Mac OS X only)
370 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Resizing options
Table 7-29 Resizing options
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Print Document On x x x x x
Scale to Fit x x x x x x
Allow Scaling from Large Paper x x x x x
% of Normal Size x x x x x x
Rotate by 180 degrees x x x x x x x
Color settings
Table 7-30 Color settings
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Mac
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Mac
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Color Options x x x x x x x
Manual/automatic color options x x x x x x
CMYK inks x x x
Print in Grayscale x x x x x x x
Color/monochrome switching x x x x x x x
ICM Method x x x
ICM Intent x x x
Print in Grayscale blocked
(HP PCL 6 Unidriver [Black]
only)
x
sRGB (ColorSmart for legacy
HP LaserJet printers)
x x x x x
CMYK color management x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 371
Engineering Details
Watermarks
Table 7-31 Driver support for watermarks feature
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
11
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Watermarks on/off x x x x x x x
First page only x x x x x x x
Custom watermark definition x x x x x x x
Watermark angle x x x x x x x
Watermark font name x x x x x x x
Watermark font color x x x x x x x
Watermark font shading x x x x x x x
Watermark font size x x x x x x x
Watermark font style x x x x x x x
Locally defined watermarks x x x x x
1
Mac OS 9 (Mac OS X Classic) only; not supported by Mac OS X or later.
Alternative source/paper type
Table 7-32 Driver support for the alternate source/paper type feature
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
All pages the same x x x x x x x
Use different paper (UI control) x x x x x x
Front Cover (Blank Front Cover
Inserted)
x x x x x
First Page x x x x x x
Other pages x x x x x x
Last Page x x x x x
Back Cover – Blank Back Cover
Inserted
xxx xx
372 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Printing destination
Table 7-33 Driver support for the printing-destination feature
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Paper Destinations x x x x x x
Finishing options and duplexing
Table 7-34 Duplexing
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Auto duplex/print on both sides x x x x x x x
Manual duplex x x x x x x
Mixed duplex and simplex in
single job
x x x x x
Long Edge/Short Edge (Flip On) x x x x x x x
Pages per sheet (N-up) x x x x x x x
Page borders on/off x x x x x x
Page order (N-Up) x x x x x x
Booklet Printing (layout through
software)
x x x x x x (Mac OS X only)
Booklet Target Size x x x x x
Other document options
Table 7-35 Other document options
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Orientation (portrait/landscape) x x x x x x x
Number of copies x x x x x x x
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 373
Engineering Details
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
Ignore application collation x x
Collate x x x x x x x
Collate – feature in driver UI x x
Collate through mopy x x x x x x x
Advanced printing features x x x
Mirror image/mirror output x x x
Font support
Table 7-36 Font support
Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98, Me Macintosh
Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh
Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript
General device font support x x x x x
Font substitution x x x x x
Font DIMM (on/off) x x x x
Send TrueType as Bitmap x x x x
TrueType Fonts (UI option) x x
Print Text as Black x x x x x
Postscript-specific features
Table 7-37 Driver support for postscript-specific features
Operating system Windows XP Windows 98, Me Macintosh
HP unidriver Postscript
Driver PS Emulation
Unidriver
PS Emulation
Driver
Postscript
Postscript memory x x
Output protocol x x
Send CTRL-D before each job x x
Send CTRL-D after each job x x
Table 7-35 Other document options (continued)
374 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Operating system Windows XP Windows 98, Me Macintosh
HP unidriver Postscript
Driver PS Emulation
Unidriver
PS Emulation
Driver
Postscript
Convert gray text to postscript gray x
Convert gray graphics to postscript gray x
Add euro currency symbol x
Job timeout x x
Wait timeout x x
Minimum font size to download as outline x
Minimum font size to download as bitmap x
Printing Preferences
CMYK Inks xxx
Postscript Language Level xx
Send postscript error handler x x
Fit to Page x
Output options
Optimize for speed x x
Optimize for portability x x
Encapsulated postscript (EPS) x x
Archive format x x
Fit to Page x x
TrueType font download option
Automatic x x
Outline x x
Bitmap x x
Native TrueType x x
Table 7-37 Driver support for postscript-specific features (continued)
ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 375
Engineering Details
376 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
% of Normal Size setting
PCL traditional drivers 118
unidrivers 227
A
About button
PCL traditional drivers 148
PS Emulation Driver 170
About tab, unidrivers 266
accessibility
documentation 19
drivers 367
accessories, automatic
configuration 31
ADA (Americans with Disabilities
Act) compliance 19
Add Printer installation 297
Additional Drivers dialog box,
Windows 294
Additional Software dialog box,
Customization Wizard 306
Additional Software dialog box,
Windows 290
Adobe Acrobat Reader
installing 26
printing PDF files without 357
viewing documentation 18
Adobe RGB
PCL traditional drivers 154
PS Emulation Driver 182
unidrivers 252
Adobe Web site 166
Advanced Printing Features setting,
unidrivers 203, 204
Advanced tab, unidrivers 201
alerts, e-mail
HP Embedded Web Server
65, 66
Macintosh 86
Allow Scaling from Large Paper,
PCL traditional drivers 163
Alternative Letterhead Mode
PCL traditional drivers 163
unidrivers 205
alternative source support 372
Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) compliance 19
AppleTalk networks 317
application settings
traditional drivers 95
unidrivers 195
ASCII output protocol, PS
Emulation Unidriver 260
autoconfiguration, driver
PCL traditional drivers 164
support for 31
unidrivers 262
autoconfiguration, Enterprise
about 31
Windows support 32
Automatic color settings
PCL traditional drivers 151
unidrivers 249
automatic two-sided printing
PS Emulation Driver 170
autorun CD-ROM, Windows 25
B
Back button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 275
Back Cover settings
PCL traditional drivers 132,
135
unidrivers 217, 222
Back to Front printing, unidrivers
206
Basic Installation
choosing 25
dialog boxes, Windows 276
Basics tab, PCL traditional drivers
146
bidirectional communication
about 31
driver support 364
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
31
binary output protocol, PS
Emulation Unidriver 260
binding settings
PCL traditional drivers 108
unidrivers 236
bins
custom paper sizes 129, 214
driver support 366
black, printing all text as
PCL traditional drivers 113,
115
unidrivers 205
booklet printing settings
PCL traditional drivers 109
unidrivers 236
both sides, printing on
PCL traditional driver settings
106
PS Emulation Driver 170
unidrivers 233
Bubble help 100
bundle support 365
C
Cancel button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 275
cardstock, paper type commands
343
CD-ROM
directory structure, Macintosh
12
directory structure, Windows
11
ENWW Index 377
documentation 18, 26
installer, Windows printing-
system software 24
installing Macintosh printing-
system software 316
installing Windows printing-
system software 274
languages 12
Change TCP/IP Settings dialog
box, Windows 288
Check Printer Connection dialog
box, Windows 285
CHM files, viewing 19
CMYK settings, PS Emulation
Driver 183
collation settings
PCL traditional drivers 160,
163
PS Emulation Driver 181
unidrivers 202, 264
Color Control, PS Emulation Driver
172
Color Options, PS Emulation Driver
182
color printing
driver support 371
ICC profiles 40
Image Color Management (ICM)
203
PANTONE color profiles 41
restricting from control panel
38
restricting from HP Embedded
Web Server 69
restricting from Macintosh 90
settings, controlling 38
Color tab
PCL traditional drivers 150
unidrivers 248
Color Themes
PCL traditional drivers 154
PS Emulation Driver 182
unidrivers 251
Color Usage log, Macintosh 83
command-line printing, Windows
357
command-line silent install for
Windows 311
commands, paper
size 341
source 339
type 343
common installer, features 26
Configuration Page, HP Embedded
Web Server 62
Configure Device page, HP
Embedded Web Server 65
Configure tab, PCL traditional
drivers 157
Confirm Changing Setting dialog
box, Windows 284
Confirm Network Settings dialog
box, Windows 283
connectivity
bidirectional communication
support 31
driver support 364
features 6
Printer Connection dialog box,
Windows 278
Searching dialog box, Windows
279
constraint messages
PCL traditional drivers 99
unidrivers 199
context-sensitive help
PCL traditional drivers 99
PS Emulation Driver 166
unidrivers 199
continuous export 36
control panel settings
traditional drivers 95
unidrivers 195
Copy Count settings
PCL traditional drivers 147
PS Emulation Driver 169
unidrivers 202, 264
covers, use different paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 132
unidrivers 217
Ctrl-D settings 193, 261
Custom Installation
choosing 25
dialog boxes, Windows 276
Custom Installer Location dialog
box, Windows
Customization Wizard 307
custom paper sizes
PCL traditional drivers 126,
342
PCL unidrivers 213, 342
customer support 61
Customization Wizard
dialog boxes 298
D
default Print Task Quick Sets
PCL traditional drivers 102
unidrivers 208
default printer, setting 312
deleting job-storage jobs 145
destinations, paper 339
Device Information page, HP
Embedded Web Server 60, 65
Device Installer Customization
Wizard
dialog boxes 298
Device Options tab, PS Emulation
Driver 176
Device Settings tab, unidrivers
256
Device Status page, HP Embedded
Web Server 61
diagnostics 37, 254
dialog boxes, printing-system
software installation
Mac OS X 330
Mac OS X Classic 329
Windows 276
Windows Customization Wizard
298
Digital Imaging Options, unidrivers
223
DIMMs, fonts
PCL traditional driver settings
162
unidriver settings 258
direct printing
FTP, Windows 357
local port, Windows 359
LPR 361
networks, Windows 361
UNIX 361
direct-connect installation 276
directory structure, software CD-
ROM
Macintosh 12
Windows 11
disabling
driver features 35
378 Index ENWW
disk. See hard disk
disk space requirements
Macintosh and Linux 7
Windows 7
Document Options
PCL traditional drivers 105
unidrivers 203, 233
document preview image
PCL traditional drivers 112,
118, 136, 148, 156
unidrivers 223, 227, 238, 253
documentation
Help feature support 367
HP Embedded Web Server User
Guide 20
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 21
install notes 20
localized versions 13
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, HP Traditional
PCL traditional drivers 105
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, unidriver 211
User Guide 19
viewing 18, 26
double-sided printing
PCL traditional driver settings
106
PS Emulation Driver 170
unidriver settings 233
downloading
firmware 344
printing-system software 9
Driver Work Space (DWS) 163
drivers
accessibility support 367
accessory configuration 31
Add Printer installation 297
availability by operating system
10
bidirectional communication
support 364
bins supported 366
bundle support 365
color options 371
connectivity support 364
continuous export feature 36
destination support 373
diagnostics 37
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
31
finishing options 373
font support 374
Help feature support 367
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 36, 365
included 27
installable options support
366
job stream output support 362
job tracking 363
job-storage support 369
Linux operating systems 8
lockable features 35, 84
Macintosh 30
media supported 339
network preconfiguration 34
paper source commands 339
paper supported 368
PCL 6 color raster compression
support 362
PJL encoding 363, 372
Point and Print installation
311
Postcript-specific features 374
Print Quality options 112
Print Task Quick Sets support
368
PS Emulation Driver features
165
quality settings 370
reordering options 370
resizing options support 371
Services support 367
settings 95, 195
standalone 8
tray assignment 366
UNIX operating systems 9
user interface support 367
watermarks support 372
Drivers dialog box, Customization
Wizard 304
Drivers dialog box, Windows 289
duplexing unit
custom paper sizes 129, 214
media supported 341
models including 5
PCL traditional driver settings
106, 159
print modes 107
PS Emulation Driver settings
170, 188
unidriver configuration 263
unidriver settings 233
DWS (Driver Work Space) 163
E
e-mail alerts
HP Embedded Web Server
65, 66
Macintosh 86
E-mail Server page, HP Embedded
Web Server 65
Easy Printer Care
about 42
accessing 43
availiability 338
Find Other Printers 44
Maintenance Tools pane 55
My HP Printers screen 49
Printer Usage Report 56
Support tab 53
Troubleshooting Tools pane
58
uninstallation 338
Update screen 57
Edge Control settings
PCL traditional drivers 152
PS Emulation Driver 183
unidrivers 250
Edit Other Links page, HP
Embedded Web Server 65
Effects tab
PCL traditional drivers 116
unidrivers 225
Embedded Jetdirect page, printing
59
embedded Web server. See HP
Embedded Web Server
Energy Star compliance 5
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
about 31
Novell NetWare operating
systems supported 33
Windows operating systems
supported 32
envelopes, paper type commands
343
escape sequences
ENWW Index 379
paper source 339
paper type 343
event log 60
EWS. See HP Embedded Web
Server
exporting driver parameters 36
External Fonts settings, PCL
unidrivers 258
F
features 4
File to E-mail utility 336
File Upload, Macintosh 81
Find Other Printers, HP Easy
Printer Care 44
Finish dialog box, Customization
Wizard 310
Finish dialog box, Windows 295
finishing options 373
Finishing tab
PCL traditional drivers 101
unidrivers 232
Firewall Detected dialog box,
Windows 280
firewalls dialog box, Windows
280
firmware
determining current level 344
downloading 344
FTP updates, Windows 348
HP Web Jetadmin updates
355
LPR command updates 355
Macintosh updates 82, 349,
353
messages during update 345
troubleshooting updates 345
UNIX updates 353
updating remotely 344
verifying installation 346
Windows network updates
352
Windows, local port update
350
first page out 4
First Page paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 133
unidrivers 218
Fit to Page settings
PCL Traditional Drivers 117
PS Emulation Driver 182
Flip Pages Up
PCL traditional drivers 108
unidriver settings 236
Font Substitution Table, PS
Emulation Unidriver 257
fonts
DIMM settings, PCL traditional
drivers 162
DIMM settings, unidrivers 258
driver support 374
External, PCL unidrivers 258
features 5
Macintosh 315
PS 3 emulation 165
PS Emulation Driver settings
174
PS Emulation Unidriver 262
Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL
traditional drivers 113, 114
Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL
unidrivers 205
substitution table, PS Emulation
Driver 174
substitution table, unidrivers
258
TrueType download option
375
unidriver settings 203
Upload Fonts, HP Printer Utility
80
watermarks 121
Windows 268, 270
Form to Tray Assignment,
unidrivers 257
Front Cover settings
PCL traditional drivers 132
unidrivers 217
FTP
direct printing, Windows 357
Windows firmware updates
348
Full Installation
choosing 25
dialog boxes, Windows 276
G
Graphic settings
PCL traditional drivers 113,
114
unidrivers 203
Graphics tab, PS Emulation Driver
171
grayscale printing
PCL traditional drivers 153
PS Emulation Driver 181
guides. See documentation
H
Halftone settings
PCL traditional drivers 153
PS Emulation Driver 173, 183
unidrivers 251
hard disk
features 4
models including 4
printer 263
PS Emulation Driver settings
189
unidriver settings 263
heavy paper, paper type commands
343
help
Bubble 100
Macintosh 314
operating systems supported
367
PCL traditional drivers 99
PS Emulation Driver 166
unidrivers 199
Help button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 275
HP Device Installer Customization
Wizard
dialog boxes 298
HP Digital Imaging Options,
unidrivers 223
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check
Tool 37
HP Driver Preconfiguration
driver support 365
operating systems and drivers
supported 36
status, PCL traditional drivers
149
HP Easy Printer Care
about 42
accessing 43
availiability 338
Find Other Printers 44
380 Index ENWW
Maintenance Tools pane 55
My HP Printers screen 49
Printer Usage Report 56
Support tab 53
Troubleshooting Tools pane
58
uninstallation 338
Update screen 57
HP Embedded Web Server
about 59
alerts page 65
AutoSend page 65
Configuration Page 62
Configure Device page 65
Device Information page 60,
65
Device Status page 61
documentation 20
E-mail Server page 65
HP Printer Utility, accessing
from 93
HP Web Jetadmin 59
Information tab 60
language, setting 65
links 61, 65
Macintosh support 314
navigation 60
Networking tab 70
Security page 65, 68
Settings tab 64
time settings 65
user guide 59
HP Instant Support 61
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
21
HP Jetdirect page, printing 59
HP LaserJet Utility, Macintosh
firmware updates 354
HP Network Registry Agent
(HPNRA) 31
HP PCL traditional drivers. See PCL
traditional drivers
HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL
unidrivers
HP Printer Utility, Macintosh
about 73
accessing 73
Color Usage log 83
Device Information 78
E-mail Alerts 86
Embedded Web Server access
93
File Upload 81
HP Support 79
Lock Resources 84
Network Settings 87
Rendezvous Setting 88
Restrict Color 90
Supplies Management 89
Supplies Status 76
Tray Configuration 84
Update Firmware 82
Upload Fonts 80
HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See
PS Emulation Unidriver
HP Registration dialog box,
Windows 297
HP Software License Agreement
dialog box, Windows 278
HP Toolbox, not supported 23
HP Traditional Postscript 3
Emulation Driver. See PS
Emulation Driver
HP Web Jetadmin
downloading 26, 94
Driver Preconfiguration Plugin
34
firmware updates 355
HP Embedded Web Server
59
HPNRA (HP Network Registry
Agent) 31
HPPJL Encoding 179
HTML files, viewing 19
I
ICC color profiles 40
Ignore Application Collation, PCL
traditional drivers 160, 163
Image Color Management (ICM)
203
inches, settings 130
Include types in application source
list option in drivers 164
Incompatible Print Settings
messages. See constraint
messages
Information tab, HP Embedded
Web Server 60
input trays. See trays
install notes 20
Installable Options
PS Emulation Driver 188
PS Emulation Unidriver 262
installation
Add Printer 297
Adobe Acrobat Reader 26
command-line silent 311
Customization Wizard for
Windows 298
dialog boxes, Mac OS X 330
dialog boxes, Mac OS X Classic
329
File to E-mail utility 336
Macintosh printing-system
software 316
Point and Print 311
pre-existing, modifying 276
system requirements for
Macintosh and Linux operating
systems 7
system requirements for
Windows operating systems
7
Windows printing-system
software 274
Installation Type dialog box,
Windows 288
installers
availability by operating system
10
common, features 26
customizing 298
localized versions 13
Windows 24
Installing dialog box, Customization
Wizard 310
Installing dialog box, Windows
294
Instant Support 61
International Color Consortium
profiles
viewing 40
IP address, locating 59
J
Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin
Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
21
Job Notification Options
ENWW Index 381
PCL traditional drivers 143
Job storage
enabling in PCL traditional
drivers 161
Macintosh 85
operating systems supported
369
PCL traditional drivers 138
PS Emulation Driver 179, 189
unidriver settings 240, 263
job stream output support 362
Job Timeout settings 191, 261
job tracking 363
L
landscape orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 108,
147
PS Emulation Driver 169
unidrivers 236, 238
Language Selection dialog box,
Customization Wizard 299, 300
Language Selection dialog box,
Windows 276
languages
CD-ROMs 12
HP Embedded Web Server
65
Language Selection dialog box,
Windows 276
large paper, allowing scaling 163
Last Page settings
PCL traditional drivers 134
unidrivers 220
Layout Options, unidrivers 206
letterhead, alternative mode
PCL traditional drivers 163
unidrivers 205
license agreement dialog box,
Windows 278
links
HP Embedded Web Server
61, 65
Linux operating systems
driver availability 8
system requirements 7
local port command line printing,
Windows 359
localized CD-ROMs 12
lockable features, drivers 35, 84
LPR commands
firmware updates 355
printing PDF files 361
M
Macintosh operating systems
availability of software
components 10
Classic support 30
Color Usage log 83
components, software 314
Device Information 78
dialog boxes, Mac OS X Classic
printing-system software
installation 329
dialog boxes, Mac OS X printing-
system software installation
330
direct printing 357
directory structure, software CD-
ROM 12
driver versions 30
e-mail alerts 86
File Upload command 81
firmware upgrades 349, 353
fonts supported 315
HP Embedded Web Server
314
HP Printer Utility 73
install notes 314
installers 10
installing printing-system
software 316
locking driver features 84
network settings 87
network setup 316, 326
online help 314
PDEs 314
PPDs 314
Rendezvous Setting 88
Restrict Color 90
setting up products with Mac OS
X 325
stored jobs 85
Supplies Management 89
supplies status 76
supported 8
system requirements 7
tray configuration 84
uninstalling printing-system
software 327
Update Firmware 82
Upload Fonts 80
Maintenance Tools pane, HP Easy
Printer Care 55
Manual color settings
PCL traditional drivers 151
unidrivers 249
manuals. See documentation
margins
PCL 6 driver 341
PS Emulation Driver 169
measurement units 130
media. See paper
memory
base 4
installation requirements for
Macintosh and Linux operating
systems 7
installation requirements for
Windows operating systems
7
PCL traditional driver settings
163
PS Emulation Driver settings
178
PS Emulation Unidriver settings
260
unidriver settings 263
messages, constraint
PCL traditional drivers 99
unidrivers 199
Microsoft Point and Print installation
311
millimeters, settings 130
mirror image, PS Emulation Driver
173
model scripts, UNIX 9
models
features 4
PCL traditional driver settings
158
moire effect, handling 113, 115
Mopier settings
PCL traditional drivers 160
PS Emulation Driver 189
unidriver 263
More Configuration Options, PCL
traditional drivers 161
382 Index ENWW
My HP Printers screen, HP Easy
Printer Care 49
N
negative image, PS Emulation
Driver 173
Networking tab, HP Embedded
Web Server 70
networks
bidirectional communication
support 364
color printing, restricting 38
direct printing 361
Embedded Jetdirect page,
printing 59
firewalls 280
firmware updates 352
HP Driver Preconfiguration 34
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 21
HP Web Jetadmin, downloading
94
Macintosh settings 87
Macintosh setup 316, 317,
326
Point and Print installation
311
settings 72
TCP/IP Settings, Windows
installation dialog box 288
Windows printing-system
software installation 274
Neutral Grays settings
PCL traditional drivers 153
PS Emulation Driver 183
unidrivers 251
Next steps dialog box, Windows
295
Novell NetWare operating systems,
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 33
number of copies, setting
PCL traditional drivers 147
PS Emulation Driver 169
unidrivers 202, 264
O
online help. See help
operating systems
availability of software
components 10
bidirectional communication
support 364
bins supported 366
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 32
Help feature support 367
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 365
PCL 6 color raster compression
support 362
Postscript feature support 374
Services tab support 367
standalone drivers 8
supported 8
user interface support 367
Optimizations option, PCL
unidrivers 204
Optional Paper Sources, PCL
traditional drivers 160
ordering supplies 26, 51
orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 108,
147
PS Emulation Driver 169
unidrivers 236, 238
Other Pages paper settings
PCL traditional drivers 134
unidrivers 220
output bins. See bins
Output Protocol settings, PS
Emulation Unidriver 260
Output Settings, PCL traditional
drivers 113, 115
P
Page Order settings
PCL traditional drivers 111
unidrivers 206, 237
page orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 108,
147
PS Emulation Driver 169
unidrivers 236, 238
Page Setup tab, PS Emulation
Driver 166
pages per minute 4
Pages per Sheet settings
PCL traditional drivers 110
unidrivers 237
PANTONE color profiles 41
paper
Allow Scaling from Large 163
Alternative Letterhead Mode
163, 205
custom sizes, PCL driver
support 342
custom sizes, PCL traditional
driver settings 126
custom sizes, PCL unidriver
settings 213
driver support 368
Include types in application
source list setting 164
margins 341
Pages per Sheet settings, PCL
traditional drivers 110
Pages per Sheet settings,
unidrivers 237
Print Document On settings,
PCL traditional drivers 117
Print Document On settings,
unidrivers 226
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 233
Print on Both Sides, PCL
traditional drivers 106
PS Emulation Driver settings
167
size commands 341
Size is settings, PCL traditional
drivers 125
Size is settings, unidrivers
213
sizes supported 5
source commands 339
Source is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 130
Source is settings, unidrivers
215
sources and destinations 339
type commands 343
Type is: settings, PCL traditional
drivers 131
Type is: settings, unidrivers
216
types and sizes supported
339
types supported 341
ENWW Index 383
Paper Handling Options, PCL
traditional drivers 159
Paper Options
PCL traditional drivers 125
unidrivers 212
Paper tab, PCL traditional drivers
124
Paper/Output settings, unidrivers
202
Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 207
parallel port direct-connect
installation 276
PCL 6 raster compression support
362
PCL documents, printing 60
PCL files, command-line printing
357
PCL traditional drivers
About button 148
accessing 97
Allow Scaling from Large Paper
163
Alternative Letterhead Mode
163
alternative source support
372
Basics tab 146
bidirectional communication
support 364
bins supported 366
Booklet Printing 109
bundle support 365
Color tab 150
Color Themes box 154
Configuration Status 149
Configure tab 157
connectivity support 364
custom paper sizes 342
destination support 373
Document Options 105
document preview image
112, 118, 136, 148, 156
duplexing unit settings 159
Effects tab 116
finishing options 373
Finishing tab 101
Fit to Page settings 117
font support 374
Graphic settings 113, 114
grayscale printing 153
Help feature support 367
Help system 99
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 36
Ignore Application Collation
163
Include types in application
source list setting 164
included 27
installable options support
366
Job Storage, enabling 161
job stream output support 362
job tracking 363
Job-storage settings 138
job-storage support 369
localized versions 13
margins 341
media supported 339
memory settings 163
Mopier Enabled settings 160
More Configuration Options
161
operating systems supported
10
Optional Paper Sources 160
Output Settings 113, 115
Paper Handling Options 159
Paper Options 125
paper size commands 341
paper source commands 339
paper supported 368
Paper tab 124
paper type commands 343
PCL 6 color raster compression
support 362
PJL encoding 363
preconfiguration support 365
Print Quality Details settings
112, 113
Print Quality group box 112
Print Task Quick Sets 102
Print Task Quick Sets support
368
Printer Model box 158
product image 136
quality settings 370
reordering options 370
resizing options support 371
RGB Color settings 154
Scale to Fit 117
Services tab 367
tray assignment 366
Update Now button 164
user interface support 367
Watermarks settings 119
watermarks support 372
PCL unidrivers
% of Normal Size 227
About tab 266
accessing 197
Advanced Printing Features
203
Advanced tab 201
Alternative Letterhead Mode
205
alternative source support
372
Automatic Configuration 262
bidirectional communication
support 364
bins supported 366
booklets 236
bundle support 365
Color tab 248
Color Themes 251
connectivity support 364
Copy Count settings 202
custom paper sizes 342
destination support 373
Device Settings tab 256
Document Options 203, 233
document preview image
223, 227, 238, 253
duplexing 233
Edge Control 250
Effects tab 225
External Fonts settings 258
features 195
finishing options 373
Finishing tab 232
Flip Pages Up 236
Font DIMM Installer 258
Font Substitution Table 258
font support 374
Form to Tray Assignment 257
Graphic setting 203
Halftone settings 251
Help feature support 367
Help system 199
384 Index ENWW
HP Digital Imaging Options
223
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 36
Image Color Management (ICM)
203
included 27
Installable Options settings
262
installable options support
366
job stream output support 362
job tracking 363
Job-storage settings 240
job-storage support 369
Layout Options 206
localized versions 13
media supported 339
Mopier settings 263
Neutral Grays 251
operating systems supported
10
Pages per Sheet 237
Paper Options 212
paper size commands 341
paper supported 368
paper type commands 343
Paper/Output settings 202
Paper/Quality tab 207
PCL 6 color raster compression
support 362
PJL encoding 363
preconfiguration support 365
Print Optimizations option 204
Print Task Quick Sets 208
Print Task Quick Sets support
368
Printer Features 205
Printing Preferences tab 197
Properties tab 198
quality settings 370
raster compression 206
reordering options 370
Resizing Options settings 226
resizing options support 371
Scale to Fit 226
Services tab 254, 367
tray assignment 366
TrueType font settings 203
user interface support 367
Watermarks settings 228
watermarks support 372
PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions)
314
PDF files
command-line printing 357
installing Adobe Acrobat Reader
26
LPR commands, printing 361
Macintosh, File Upload
command 81
printing using HP Embedded
Web Server 60
viewing 19
Percentage of Normal Size setting
PCL traditional drivers 118
unidrivers 227
PINs, private jobs
PCL traditional drivers 143
PS Emulation Driver 180
unidrivers 244, 245
PJL encoding 363
Point and Print installation,
Windows printing-system
software 311
Port Creation Options dialog box,
Customization Wizard 304
port selection dialog box, Windows
Customization Wizard 301
portrait orientation settings
PCL traditional drivers 108,
147
PS Emulation Driver 169
unidrivers 236, 238
ports, included 6
PostScript Device settings, PS
Emulation Unidriver 260
postscript documents, printing 60
PostScript Options, unidrivers
204
PostScript Passthrough 264
Postscript printer description (PPD)
files 314
PostScript tab
Advanced button 192
bitmap compression 192
Ctrl-D settings 193
data format 193
error information 191
header 191
language level 192
output format 191
PS Emulation Driver 189
timeout value 191
PPD (postscript printer description)
files 314
pre-existing installation, modifying
276
preconfiguration, driver 34
preview image, document
PCL traditional drivers 112,
118, 136, 148, 156
unidrivers 238, 253
Print All Text as Black
PCL traditional drivers 113,
115
unidrivers 205
Print Document On settings
PCL traditional drivers 117
unidrivers 226
print modes 107
Print on Both Sides
PCL traditional driver settings
106
PS Emulation Driver 170
unidriver settings 233
Print Optimizations option, PCL
unidrivers 204
Print Page Borders settings
PCL traditional drivers 111
unidrivers 237
Print Quality Details, PCL traditional
drivers 112, 113
Print Task Quick Sets, PCL
traditional drivers
about 102
defaults 102
use guide 105
Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers
about 208
custom 212
defaults 208
use guide 211
print-ready files
command-line printing 357
printing by FTP 357
printing by local WIndows port
359
printing by Windows network
361
ENWW Index 385
printing in UNIX systems 361
printing using HP Embedded
Web Server 60
printing with LPR command
361
Printer Connection dialog box, Full
Installation 278
printer control panel settings
traditional drivers 95
unidrivers 195
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs)
314
Printer Driver Test Page dialog box,
Windows 296
Printer Features, unidrivers 205
Printer Found dialog box, Windows
282, 283
Printer Model
features 4
PCL traditional driver settings
158
Printer Not Found dialog box,
Windows 281
Printer Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 301
Printer Properties dialog box,
Customization Wizard 308
Printer Properties dialog box,
Windows 292
Printer Settings dialog box,
Windows 286
printer, setting default 312
printing
direct in a Windows network
361
direct in UNIX 361
direct using FTP 357
direct using local Windows port
359
direct using LPR command
361
files using HP Embedded Web
Server 60
User Guide 19
Printing Preferences tabs 197
Private job settings
PCL traditional drivers 141
PS Emulation Driver 180
unidrivers 244
PRN files, printing 60
product image 136
product support 61
Proof and Hold job settings
PCL traditional drivers 141
PS Emulation Driver 180
unidrivers 243
Properties tabs 198
protocols
configuring 72
PS Emulation Unidriver 260
Windows installation dialog box
288
PS 3 font emulation 165
PS Emulation Driver
About 170
alternative source support
372
bidirectional communication
support 364
bins supported 366
bundle support 365
collation settings 181
Color Control 172
Color Options 182
connectivity support 364
context-sensitive help 166
copies, number of 169
destination support 373
Device Options tab 176
Edge Control 183
features 165, 374
finishing options 373
Fit to Page 182
font support 374
Fonts tab 174
Graphics tab 171
grayscale printing 181
halftone settings 173, 183
Help feature support 367
Help system 166
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 36
HPPJL Encoding 179
included 27
Installable Options 188
installable options support
366
job stream output support 362
job tracking 363
job-storage settings 179, 189
job-storage support 369
localized versions 13
media supported 339
memory settings 178
mirror image, printing 173
Mopier Mode 189
More Options 170
negative image, printing 173
Neutral Grays 183
operating systems supported
10
Page Setup tab 166
paper supported 368
PJL encoding 363
PostScript tab 189
preconfiguration support 365
Print Quality group box 112
Print Task Quick Sets support
368
Printer features group box
178
Printing on Both Sides 170
PS 3 font emulation 165
quality settings 370
reordering options 370
resizing options support 371
resolution settings 172
Scaling control 173
Services tab 367
tray assignment 366
tray settings 169
Unprintable Area 169
user interface support 367
Watermark settings 185
Watermarks settings 184
watermarks support 372
Window duplexing unit settings
188
PS emulation fonts 270
PS Emulation Unidriver
% of Normal Size 227
About tab 266
accessing 197
Advanced Printing Features
203
Advanced tab 201
Alternative Letterhead Mode
205
alternative source support
372
386 Index ENWW
Automatic Configuration 262
bidirectional communication
support 364
bins supported 366
booklets 236
bundle support 365
Color tab 248
Color Themes 251
connectivity support 364
Copy Count settings 202
Ctrl-D settings 261
destination support 373
Device Settings tab 256
Document Options 203, 233
document preview image
223, 227, 238, 253
duplexing 233
Edge Control 250
Effects tab 225
features 195, 374
finishing options 373
Finishing tab 232
Flip Pages Up 236
Font DIMM Installer 258
font settings 262
Font Substitution Table 257
font support 374
Form to Tray Assignment 257
Graphic setting 203
Halftone settings 251
Help feature support 367
Help system 199
HP Digital Imaging Options
223
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 36
Image Color Management (ICM)
203
included 27
Installable Options settings
262
installable options support
366
job stream output support 362
job tracking 363
Job-storage settings 240
job-storage support 369
Layout Options 206
localized versions 13
media supported 339
Mopier settings 263
Neutral Grays 251
operating systems supported
10
Output Protocol settings 260
Pages per Sheet 237
Paper Options 212
paper supported 368
Paper/Output settings 202
Paper/Quality tab 207
PJL encoding 363
PostScript Device settings
260
PostScript Memory settings
260
PostScript Options 204
PostScript Passthrough 264
preconfiguration support 365
Print Task Quick Sets 208
Print Task Quick Sets support
368
Printer Features 205
Printing Preferences tabs 197
Properties tabs 198
quality settings 370
raster compression 206
reordering options 370
Resizing Options settings 226
resizing options support 371
Scale to Fit 226
Services tab 254, 367
timeout settings 261
tray assignment 366
TrueType font settings 203
user interface support 367
Watermarks settings 228
watermarks support 372
PS files, command-line printing
357
Q
quality, driver support 370
Quick Copy job settings
PCL traditional drivers 142
PS Emulation Driver 180
unidrivers 244
Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick
Sets
R
raster compression
PCL unidrivers 206
PS Emulation Unidriver 206
Ready to Create Installer dialog box
307
Ready to Install dialog box,
Windows 292
regional versions, CD-ROMs 12
Registration dialog box, Windows
297
releasing job-storage jobs 144,
187, 247
remote firmware updates
about 344
determining current firmware
level 344
downloading 344
FTP, Windows 348
HP Web Jetadmin 355
LPR commands 355
Macintosh 82, 349, 353
messages 345
troubleshooting 345
UNIX 353
verifying installation 346
Windows network 352
Windows, using local port 350
Rendezvous Setting, Macintosh
88
reordering options 370
Resizing Options
driver support 371
unidriver settings 226
resolution
driver support 370
PCL traditional driver settings
113, 115
PS Emulation Driver settings
172
Restrict Color screen, HP Printer
Utility 90
Restrict Color, HP Embedded Web
Server 69
RFU. See remote firmware updates
RGB settings
PCL traditional drivers 154
PS Emulation Driver 182
unidrivers 252
RTF files, viewing 19
ENWW Index 387
S
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature
113, 115
Scale to Fit setting
PCL traditional drivers 117
unidrivers 226
Scaling control, PS Emulation
Driver 173
screen-readable documentation
19
Searching dialog box, Windows
279
Security page, HP Embedded Web
Server 65, 68
Send Ctrl-D settings 193, 261
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
PCL traditional drivers 113,
114
PCL unidrivers 205
serial number 60
Services tab 254, 367
Set Port Name dialog box, Windows
287
settings
continuous export 36
locking 35
overriding 95, 195
Print Task Quick Sets,
PCL traditional drivers 102
Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers
208
Settings tab, HP Embedded Web
Server 64
silent installation
command-line 311
Customization Wizard 298
sizes, paper
commands 341
custom 342
margins 341
PCL Traditional Driver settings
125
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 233
Print on Both sides, PCL
traditional drivers 106
PS Emulation Driver settings
167
supported 339
unidriver settings 213
sleep mode 4
smart duplexing 233
Source is settings
PCL traditional drivers 130
PS Emulation Driver 169
unidrivers 215
sources, paper. See trays
Specify Printer dialog box, Windows
285
speed specifications 4
sRGB settings
PCL traditional drivers 154
PS Emulation Driver 182
unidrivers 252
standalone drivers 8
status
devices 61
Macintosh supplies 76, 89
supplies 60
storage, job
enabling in PCL traditional
drivers 161
Macintosh 85
operating systems supported
369
PCL traditional drivers 138
PS Emulation Driver 179, 189
unidriver settings 240, 263
Stored job settings
PCL traditional drivers 142
unidrivers 244
substitution table for fonts, PS
Emulation Driver 174
supplies
AutoSend page, HP Embedded
Web Server 65
features 6
Macintosh status 76, 89
ordering 26, 51
usage AutoSend page 65
viewing status 60
Support tab, HP Easy Printer Care
53
Support tab, HP Printer Utility 79
support, product 61
system requirements
Macintosh and Linux 7
Windows 7
T
TBCP output protocol, PS
Emulation Unidriver 260
TCP/IP address, locating 59
Test Page dialog box, Windows
296
text files, command-line printing
357
text, printing all as black
PCL traditional drivers 113,
115
unidriver 205
time settings, HP Embedded Web
Server 65
timeout settings 191, 261
Toolbox, not supported 23
traditional drivers. See PCL
traditional drivers; PS Emulation
Driver
transparencies, paper type
commands 343
trays
Alternative Letterhead Mode
163, 205
autoconfiguration 31
custom paper sizes 129, 214
driver support 366
included 6, 339
Installable Options, PS
Emulation Driver 188
Macintosh configuration 84
media supported 5, 341
paper source commands 339
paper type commands 343
PCL traditional driver settings
160
PS Emulation Driver settings
169
Source is settings, PCL
traditional drivers 130
Source is settings, unidrivers
215
unidriver configuration 263
unidriver Form to Tray
Assignment 257
troubleshooting
File to E-mail utility 336
firmware upgrades 345
HP driver Diagnostic Printer
Check Tool 37
388 Index ENWW
Services tab, unidrivers 254
Troubleshooting Tools pane, HP
Easy Printer Care 58
TrueType font settings
PS Emulation Unidriver 262
Send as Bitmap, PCL traditional
drivers 113, 114
Send as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers
205
substitution table, PS Emulation
Driver 174
unidrivers 203
two-sided printing
PCL traditional driver settings
106
PS Emulation Driver 170
unidriver settings 233
TXT files, command-line printing
357
Type is settings
PCL traditional drivers 131
unidrivers 216
types, paper
Include in application source list
setting 164
PCL traditional drivers settings
131
Print on Both Sides settings,
unidrivers 233
Print on Both sides, PCL
traditional drivers 106
supported 341
unidriver settings 216
U
unattended installation
command-line 311
Customization Wizard 298
unidrivers
% of Normal Size 227
About tab 266
accessing 197
Advanced Printing Features
203
Advanced tab 201
Alternative Letterhead Mode
205
alternative source support
372
Automatic Configuration 262
automatic configuration 33
bidirectional communication
support 364
bins supported 366
booklets 236
bundle support 365
Color tab 248
Color Themes 251
connectivity support 364
constraint messages 199
Copy Count settings 202
custom paper sizes 342
destination support 373
Device Settings tab 256
Document Options 203, 233
document preview image
223, 227, 238, 253
duplexing 233
Edge Control 250
Effects tab 225
features 195
finishing options 373
Finishing tab 232
Flip Pages Up 236
Font DIMM Installer 258
font settings 258
Font Substitution Table 258
font support 374
Form to Tray Assignment 257
Graphic setting 203
Halftone settings 251
Help feature support 367
Help system 199
HP Digital Imaging Options
223
HP Driver Preconfiguration 36
Image Color Management (ICM)
203
Installable Options settings
262
job stream output support 362
job tracking 363
Job-storage settings 240
job-storage support 369
Layout Options 206
media supported 339
Mopier settings 263
Neutral Grays 251
operating systems supported
10
Pages per Sheet 237
Paper Options 212
paper size commands 341
paper supported 368
paper type commands 343
Paper/Output settings 202
Paper/Quality tab 207
PCL 6 color raster compression
support 362
PJL encoding 363
PostScript Options 204
PostScript Passthrough 264
preconfiguration support 365
Print Task Quick Sets 208
Print Task Quick Sets support
368
Printer Features 205
Printing Preferences tabs 197
Properties tabs 198
quality settings 370
reordering options 370
Resizing Options settings 226
resizing options support 371
Scale to Fit 226
Services tab 254, 367
tray assignment 366
TrueType font settings 203
user interface support 367
Watermarks settings 228
watermarks support 372
uninstallation
HP Easy Printer Care 338
Macintosh printing system
327
units of measurement 130
UNIX operating systems
direct printing 361
driver availability 9
print-ready printing 361
remote firmware update 353
Web site for 8
Unprintable Area, PS Emulation
Driver 169
Unsupported Operating System
dialog box, Windows 277
Update Now feature 32, 33, 164
Update screen, HP Easy Printer
Care 57
updating firmware remotely. See
remote firmware update
ENWW Index 389
usage page 60
Usage Report, HP Easy Printer
Care 56
USB direct-connect installation
276
Use Different Paper, PCL traditional
drivers 132
Use Different Paper/Covers,
unidrivers 217
User Guide 19
User Name 143, 245
W
Wait Timeout settings 191, 261
wake time, setting 4
Watermarks settings
drivers supported 372
PCL traditional drivers 119
PS Emulation Driver 184, 185
unidrivers 228
Web Jetadmin. See HP Web
Jetadmin
Web sites
Adobe 166
downloading software 9
firmware download 344
HP Embedded Web Server links
61, 65
HP Embedded Web Server user
guide 59
Linux product support 7
support links 26
UNIX model scripts 9
UNIX support 8
Welcome dialog box,
Customization Wizard 300
Welcome dialog box, Windows
Full Installation 277
What's this? Help
PS Emulation Driver 166
unidrivers 199
Windows operating systems
Add Printer installation 297
availability of software
components 10
CD-ROM, print system 24
default printer, setting 312
dialog boxes 276
direct printing, FTP 357
direct printing, local port 359
direct printing, networks 361
directory structure, software CD-
ROM 11
driver versions 28
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 32
fonts supported 268
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 36
Installer Customization Wizard
298
installers 10
installing printing software
274
LPR commands 361
Point and Print installation
311
PS Emulation Driver features
165
PS emulation fonts supported
270
remote firmware update 350
supported 8
system requirements 7
unidriver features 195
390 Index ENWW
© 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com

Navigation menu